Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual PDF
A LT
EA O
W N
ER S
M A
N U
A L
In gl
s 5
P0 01
20 03
D G
(0 7.
09 )
( G
T9 )
5P 00
12 00
3D G
A LT
EA In
gl s
( 07
.0 9)
Portada ALTEA.qxd:Maquetacin 1 1/9/09 13:08 Pgina 3
SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com- prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehculo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la tcnica. Por esta razn, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basndose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente Manual.
Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la informacin en el momento de la realizacin de la impresin. Salvo error u omisin, la informacin recogida en el presente manual es vlida en la fecha de cierre de su edicin.
No est permitida la reimpresin, la reproduccin o la traduccin, total o parcial, sin la autorizacin escrita de SEAT.
SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos segn la ley sobre el "Copyright". Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificacin.
Este papel est fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.
SEAT S.A. - Reimpresin: 15.07.09
Portada ALTEA_interior.qxd:maquetacin 1/9/09 13:12 Pgina 1
efully to familiarise yourself with
ll contribute to preserve its value.
s and parts change.
as this should be kept with the
altea_EN Seite 1 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Foreword This Instruction manual and its corresponding supplements should be read car
your vehicle.
Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling wi
For safety reasons, note the information concerning accessories, modification
If selling the vehicle, give all of the onboard documentation to the new owner
vehicle.
altea_EN Seite 2 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Contents 3
shtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical
ockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
irst-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
uggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ting, Ventilation and Air conditioning . .
eating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
limatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
eneral notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ddress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
afety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tarting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . .
tart-Stop function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
utomatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox .
andbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
arking aid acoustic system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ruise control* (Cruise control - GRA) . . . . . . . .
ctical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS
ABS and TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lectronic stabilisation programme (ESP)* . . . .
ing and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
unning-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . . .
conomical and ecological driving . . . . . . . . . .
riving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
148
151
152
155
155
157
161
165
167
167
168
169
170
174
177
178
183
185
188
193
193
193
194
195
200
200
201
202
204
altea_EN Seite 3 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Contents
Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . .
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowing luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivating airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital display in the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dash panel menus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio frequency remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sliding/tilting roof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats and stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The importance of correct seat adjustment . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stowage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
s
F
L
Hea
H
C
2
G
Driv
A
S
Ig
S
S
M
A
H
P
C
Pra
Inte
B
A
(
E
Driv
R
E
E
D
5
6
7
7
7
10
16
17
19
19
21
24
28
30
30
34
37
41
44
46
46
48
51
55
55
55
57
60
61
68
77
87
87
87
91
95
95
101
102
104
106
108
110
113
113
121
124
125
129
132
132
133
135
137
139
Contents4
altea_EN Seite 4 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions to follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ball coupling of towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting a towing bracket* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . .
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle exterior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories, replacement of parts and
modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . .
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPG system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . .
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre repair kit* (Tyre Mobility System) . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes on the technical data . . . . . . .
Outstanding information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp) . . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 bhp) . . . . . . . . . .
Petrol engine 1.8 l 118 kW (160 HP) . . . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9 l TDI 66 kW (90 bhp) . . . . . . .
Diesel engine 1.9 l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp) . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0 l TDI 103 kW (140 HP) . . . . . .
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp) . . . . . . . .
Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
205
206
206
207
209
209
210
216
218
218
218
219
219
220
220
221
224
225
226
229
233
235
239
240
243
243
251
251
253
259
261
266
275
278
281
281
281
283
284
284
285
285
286
287
288
289
291
292
293
295
297
299
Manual structure 5
Manual structure What you should know before reading the on-board manual This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the
vehicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will
not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.
Because this is a general manual for the ALTEA, some of the equipment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model or model year; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.
The illustrations are intended as a general guide, and may vary from the
equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.
The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual
refer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when
otherwise indicated.
The equipment marked with an asterisk* is supplied as standard on certain
versions of the model only, it can be supplied as an option on some models,
or else it is only on sale in certain countries.
All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright symbol
does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.
The section is continued on the following page.
This shows the end of the section.
WARNING
Texts preceded by this symbol contain safety information. They warn you of serious dangers, possibly involving accident or injury.
Caution Texts preceded by this symbol draw your attention to a possible risk of
damage to your vehicle.
For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol refer to relevant points concerning environ-
mental protection.
Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.
altea_EN Seite 5 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Content6
Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organised
way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to
chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large
parts which are:
1. Safety First Information on the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat
belts, airbags, seats, etc.
2. Controls and equipment Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your
vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit-
able climate in the passenger compartment, etc.
3. Practical tips Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and
certain problems you can solve yourself.
4. Technical Data Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.
5. Alphabetic index At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help
you to rapidly find the information you require.
altea_EN Seite 6 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Safe driving 7
Safety Fir Technical Data
s a part of the occupant protection
the risk of injury in the event of acci-
he safety of your passengers in danger. In the
ty equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The
f the safety equipment in your SEAT:
e front and rear side seats,
e front seats,
r the front seats,
eat backrests,
straints*,
ts for child seats in the rear side seats with the
straints,
e position and non-use position,
n.
ned above works together to provide you and
t possible protection in the event of accidents.
not neither help you nor your passengers if you
altea_EN Seite 7 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Safety First
Safe driving
Brief introduction
Dear SEAT Driver
Safety first!
This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and
warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety
and for your passengers safety.
WARNING
This manual contains important information concerning the driver's and passengers' handling of the vehicle. The other booklets in the on board manual also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers.
Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.
Safety equipment
The safety equipment i
system and can reduce
dent.
Never put your safety and t
event of an accident, the safe
following list includes most o
three-point seat belts,
belt tension limiters for th
belt tension devices for th
belt height adjustment fo
front airbags,
side airbags in the front s
curtain airbags,
crash-active front head re
ISOFIX anchorage poin
ISOFIX system,
height-adjustable head re
head restraints with in-us
adjustable steering colum
The safety equipment mentio
your passengers with the bes
But this safety equipment can
Safe driving8
gers in the rear seats always have the
-use position page 14.
adjust the head restraints according to
propriate child seats and properly
age 46.
ing position. Instruct your passengers
r sitting position. page 10.
ecurely. Instruct your passengers also to
roperly page 19.
fety?
determined by your driving style and
of all occupants.
sible for yourself and your passengers.
r driving safety is affected by any circum-
self as well as others on the road ,
be distracted from the traffic around you,
lephone conversations.
riving ability is impaired (e.g. by medica-
d speed limits.
altea_EN Seite 8 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
or they are sitting in an incorrect position or do not properly adjust or use this
equipment.
Therefore, information is provided about why this equipment is so important,
how it protects you, what you have to consider when using it and how you and
your passengers can achieve the greatest possible benefit from the safety
equipment fitted. This manual includes important warnings that you and your
passengers should note in order to reduce the risk of injury.
Safety is everyone's business!
Before every trip
The driver bears the responsibility for his passengers and the
operational worthiness of the vehicle.
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note
the following points before every trip:
Ensure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals operate flaw-
lessly.
Check tyre pressure.
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the
surroundings.
Securely restrain all parcels page 17.
Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly according
to your size.
Ensure that the passen
head restraints in the in
Instruct passengers to
their height.
Protect children with ap
applied seat belts p
Assume the correct sitt
also to assume a prope
Fasten your safety belt s
fasten their seat belts p
What affects driving sa
Driving safety is largely
the personal behaviour
As a driver, you are respon
When your concentration o
stance, you endanger your
for this reason:
Do not allow yourself to
e.g. by passengers or te
Never drive when your d
tion, alcohol, drugs).
Observe traffic laws an
Safe driving 9
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 9 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and
weather conditions.
When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least
every two hours.
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or are in tension.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.
Safe driving10
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
he following adjustments for the driver:
el so that there is a distance of at least
ering wheel and the centre of your chest
rwards or backwards so that you are able
, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with
angled .
ch the highest point of the steering
nt so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
head fig. 2.
upright position so that your back rests
Fig. 2 Proper head restraint position for driver
altea_EN Seite 10 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Proper sitting position for occupants
Proper sitting position for driver
The proper sitting position for the driver is important for a
safe and relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend t
Adjust the steering whe
25 cm between the ste
fig. 1.
Move the driver's seat fo
to press the accelerator
your knees still slightly
Ensure that you can rea
wheel.
Adjust the head restrai
level as the top of your
level as the top of your
Move the backrest to an
completely against it.
Fig. 1 The proper distance between driver and steering wheel
Safe driving 11
Safety Fir Technical Data
for front passenger
st sit at least 25 cm away from the
airbag can provide the greatest
he event that it is triggered.
reduce the risk of injury in the event of an
the following adjustments for the front
ger seat back as far as possible .
n upright position so that your back rests
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
r head page 13.
otwell in front of the front passenger seat.
securely page 19.
e passenger airbag in exceptional circum-
ow to adjust the front passenger's seat, see
tion of the front passenger can lead to severe
altea_EN Seite 11 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Fasten your safety belt securely page 19.
Keep both feet in the foot well so that you have the vehicle under
control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat page 132.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel page 10, fig. 1. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking manoeu- vres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the back- rest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.
Proper sitting position
The front passenger mu
dash panel so that the
possible protection in t
For your own safety and to
accident, we recommend
passenger:
Move the front passen
Move the backrest to a
completely against it.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
Keep both feet in the fo
Fasten your safety belt
It is possible to deactivate th
stances page 25.
For detailed information on h
page 135.
WARNING
An incorrect sitting posi injuries.
Safe driving12
the correct position page 14.
ot well in front of the rear seat.
securely page 19.
d restraint system when you take children
6.
ear seat are not sitting properly, they could
properly in order to achieve maximum protec-
e optimal protection when backrests are in an sengers are wearing their seat belts properly. are not sitting in an upright position, the risk itioning of the belt web increases.
altea_EN Seite 12 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm between your breastbone and the dash panel. If you are sitting nearer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.
If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a qualified workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the instrument panel, out the window or on the seat. An incor- rect sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!
Adjust the head restraint properly in order to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats
Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their
feet in the foot well s and wear their seat belts properly.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking
manoeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear bench seat must
consider the following:
Adjust the headrest to
Keep both feet in the fo
Fasten your safety belt
Use an appropriate chil
in the vehicle page 4
WARNING
If the passengers on the r sustain severe injuries.
Adjust the head restraint tion.
Seat belts can only provid upright position and the pas If passengers on the rear seat of injury due to incorrect pos
WARNING (continued)
Safe driving 13
Safety Fir Technical Data
properly in order to achieve maximum
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head or as close as possible to the same
r head and, at the very least, at eye level
page 132.
restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.
d restraints could result in death in the event of
d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.
t always be adjusted according to the
d into their seats during a rear end collision. The
e backrest activates the crash-active head
hich moves rapidly forwards and upwards at the
duces the distance between the occupant's
reducing the risk of head injuries such as brain
altea_EN Seite 13 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restraint
protection.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
fig. 3 and fig. 4.
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe
Incorrectly adjusted hea a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte
The head restraints mus passenger's height.
Headrests in use*
Vehicle occupants are presse
resulting body pressure on th
restraint* on the front seat, w
same time. This movement re
head and the head rest, thus
trauma.
Fig. 3 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front
Fig. 4 Properly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side
Safe driving14
ar seat head restraints
restraints are an important part of the
can reduce the risk of injuries in
s
Fig. 5 Head restraints in correct position
Fig. 6 Head restraint position warning label
altea_EN Seite 14 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
WARNING
Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.
The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the passenger's height.
Note The crash-active head restraints* could also be triggered if a vehicle occupant
applies a high level of pressure on the backrest (e.g. by falling back into the
seat when entering the vehicle) or if pressure is applied to a front seat head
restraint from the rear. This accidental activation is, however, not dangerous
as the crash-active head restraints will return to the original position immedi-
ately and are thus once again ready.
Correct adjustment of re
Properly adjusted head
occupant protection and
most accident situation
Safe driving 15
Safety Fir Technical Data
itting positions
ition can lead to severe injuries to
timal protection only when the belt webs
ncorrect sitting positions substantially
tion of seat belts and increase the risk of
t web position. As the driver, you are
occupants, especially children.
o assume an incorrect sitting position in
lling .
amples of sitting positions that could be
The list is not complete, but we would like to
.
icle is in motion:
,
r to the rear,
sh panel,
h,
e of a seat,
w,
a window,
dash panel,
surface of a seat,
altea_EN Seite 15 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Rear outer seat head restraints
The rear outer seat head restraints have 3 positions.
Two positions for use page 14, fig. 5. In these positions, the
head restraints are used normally, protecting passengers along
with the rear seat belts.
And one position for non-use.
To fit the head restraints in position for use, pull on the edges
with both hands in the direction of the arrow.
Centre rear head restraint
The centre head restraint only has two positions, in-use (head
restraint up) and non-use (head restraint down).
WARNING
Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed window page 14, fig. 6.
Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints.
Injury risk in case of an accident!
Caution Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 133.
Examples of incorrect s
An incorrect sitting pos
occupants.
Seat belts can provide op
are properly positioned. I
reduce the protective func
injury due to incorrect bel
responsible for all vehicle
Never permit anyone t
the vehicle while trave
The following list contains ex
dangerous for all occupants.
make you aware of this issue
Therefore, whenever the veh
Never stand in the vehicle
never stand on the seats,
never kneel on the seats,
never tilt your backrest fa
never lean against the da
never lie on the rear benc
never sit on the front edg
never sit sideways,
never lean out of a windo
never put your feet out of
never put your feet on the
never put your feet on the
Safe driving16
e pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in
port your feet properly and give you a good
n can lead to critical situations while driving.
e driver footwell. An object could move into al operation. In the event of a sudden driving
ill not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ident!
r side
used which can be securely fastened
ot impair operation of the pedals.
ats are securely fastened during the trip
pedals .
ve the pedals clear and which are secured to
ou can obtain suitable floor mats from a quali-
r floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
d, an accident may occur. Risk of serious inju-
s are always securely attached.
altea_EN Seite 16 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
never travel in a foot well,
never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt,
never carry any person in the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Every incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the occupants to severe injuries if airbags trigger, by striking a passenger who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and main- tain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passengers to assume the proper sitting position and to maintain it during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
Pedal area
Pedals
The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by objects
or floor mats.
Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and
clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.
Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial posi-
tions.
Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely
fastened on the foot well.
If a brake circuit fails, the brak
order to stop the vehicle.
Wear suitable shoes
Always wear shoes which sup
feeling for the pedals.
WARNING
Restricting pedal operatio
Never place objects on th the pedal area and impair ped or braking manoeuvre, you w accelerator pedal. Risk of acc
Floor mats on the drive
Only floor mats may be
in the foot well and do n
Ensure that the floor m
and do not obstruct the
Only use floor mats which lea
prevent them from slipping. Y
fied dealership. Fasteners* fo
WARNING
If the pedals are obstructe ries.
Ensure that the floor mat
Safe driving 17
Safety Fir Technical Data
he luggage compartment and secure them on
traps to secure heavy objects.
res or accidents, loose objects can be thrown upants or passers-by. This increased risk of ed if a loose object is struck by an inflating cts can be transformed into missiles. Risk of
tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci-
ial to adjust your speed and driving style nts.
axle loads or allowed maximum weight. If the wed total weight is exceeded, the driving char- y change, leading to accidents, injuries and
unattended, especially when the tailgate is nto the luggage compartment closing the door in trapped without help and there is a mortal
lay in or around the vehicle. Close and lock doors when you leave the vehicle. Before you that there are no adults or children in the
ers in the luggage compartment. Every belted in page 19.
altea_EN Seite 17 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the pedals. Risk of accident.
Stowing luggage
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in
the luggage compartment.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the
driving safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.
Lay and stow heavy luggage as far forward as possible in the
luggage compartment.
Stow heavy luggage as low as possible in the luggage compart-
ment.
Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings page 18.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other objects in the boot could cause serious inju- ries.
Always stow objects in t the fastening rings.
Use suitable specialist s
During sudden manoeuv forward, injuring vehicle occ injury will be further increas airbag. If this happens, obje fatal injury.
Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Therefore, it is essent accordingly, to avoid accide
Never exceed the allowed allowed axle load or the allo acteristics of the vehicle ma damage to the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle open. Children could climb i behind them; they will rema risk.
Never allow children to p both the tailgate and all the lock the vehicle, make sure vehicle.
Never transport passeng passenger must be properly
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Safe driving18
her objects are secured to the fastening rings ed retaining cords, injuries could result in the or accidents.
age or other objects from flying forward, ning cords which are secured to the fastening
on the fastening rings.
altea_EN Seite 18 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used
air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart-
ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.
Straps for securing the load to the fastening rings are commercially
available.
Fastening rings*
There can be four fastening rings in the boot for fastening
luggage and other objects.
Always use suitable and undamaged straps to secure luggage
and other objects to the fastening rings in Loading the
luggage compartment on page 17.
Pull up the fastening rings to attach the straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small and light objects can build up so
much energy that they can cause very severe injuries. The amount of kinetic
energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the object.
The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying unsecured in the vehicle. During
a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, this object generates a force corre-
sponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the
object increases to about 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries
which might be sustained if this projectile strikes an occupant as it flies
through the passenger compartment. This increased risk of injury will be
further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
If pieces of baggage or ot with inappropriate or damag event of braking manoeuvres
To prevent pieces of lugg always use appropriate retai rings.
Never secure a child seat
Seat belts 19
Safety Fir Technical Data
ble seats must never be transported in your
ehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat eat. Children must be protected with an appro- .
*
as a reminder to the driver to fasten
e:
securely.
rs to fasten their seat belts properly before
ng a child seat according to the child's
itched on, the warning lamp on the instru-
driver has not fastened his/her seat belt, and a
vehicle is driven at more than 30 km/h for 90
ion
altea_EN Seite 19 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Seat belts
Brief Introduction
Before driving: remember your seat belt!
Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!
In this chapter you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts,
how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.
Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in
this chapter.
WARNING
If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases.
Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and your passen- gers must always wear the seat belts properly while the vehicle is moving.
Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other passengers, these people can also sustain severe inju- ries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, two on the front part and three on the rear part.
Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
WARNING
More people than availa vehicle.
Every passenger in the v belt belonging to his or her s priate child restraint system
Seat belt warning lamp
The warning lamp acts
the seat belt.
Before starting the vehicl
Fasten your safety belt
Instruct your passenge
driving off.
Protect children by usi
height and weight.
After the ignition has been sw
ment panel lights up1) if the
warning signal is heard if the
seconds.
1) Depending on the model vers
Seat belts20
altea_EN Seite 20 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
The warning lamp* is switched off if the driver seat belt is fastened while
the ignition is switched on.
Seat belts 21
Safety Fir Technical Data
aws of physics work in the case of a head-on
ts moving fig. 7 there is a certain amount of
rgy, both in the vehicle and in the occupants.
y depends on the speed of the vehicle and the
passengers. The higher the speed and the
energy there is to be released in an accident.
owever, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed
km/h, for example, the kinetic energy is multi-
ur example are not restrained by seat belts, the
gy has to be absorbed at the point of impact
50 km/h, the forces acting on bodies in a colli-
nne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a
ve forward at the same speed their vehicle was
Fig. 8 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts
altea_EN Seite 21 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Why wear seat belts?
Physical principles of frontal collisions
In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic
energy must be absorbed.
It is easy to explain how the l
collision: When a vehicle star
energy known as kinetic ene
The amount of kinetic energ
weight of the vehicle and its
greater the weight, the more
The most significant factor, h
doubles from 25 km/h to 50
plied by four.
Because the passengers in o
entire amount of kinetic ener
fig. 8.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h to
sion can easily exceed one to
even higher.
Passengers not wearing seat
frontal collision, they will mo
Fig. 7 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts
Seat belts22
acting on the body in a collision are so great
oneself with one's hands. In a frontal collision,
wn forward and will make violent contact with
, windscreen or whatever else is in the way
stitute for the seat belts. When triggered,
al protection. All passengers (including the
roperly during the trip. This will reduce the risk
of an accident regardless of whether an
not.
ered only once. To achieve the best possible
always be worn properly so that you will be
h no airbag is deployed.
passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they
ward violently in an accident. Rear passengers
anger not only themselves but also the front
Fig. 10 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown forward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt.
altea_EN Seite 22 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to frontal acci-
dents, but to all accidents and collisions.
The danger of not using the seat belt
The general belief that the passengers can protect them-
selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.
Even at low speeds the forces
that it is not possible to brace
unbelted passengers are thro
the steering wheel, dashboard
fig. 9.
The airbag system is not a sub
airbags provide only addition
driver) must wear seat belts p
of severe injuries in the event
airbag is fitted for the seat or
Note that airbags can be trigg
protection, the seat belt must
protected in accidents in whic
It is also important for the rear
could otherwise be thrown for
who do not use seat belts end
occupants fig. 10.
Fig. 9 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrown forward violently.
Seat belts 23
Safety Fir Technical Data
n seat belts before every trip, even when "just
wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics
aring seat belts is an effective mean of substan-
ry and improving the chances of survival in a
e, properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
e event of an accident. For this reason, wearing
in most countries.
pped with airbags, the seat belts must be
airbags, for example, are only triggered in some
rbags will not be triggered during minor frontal
ns, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the
e in the control unit is not exceeded.
wear your seat belt and ensure that your
eir seat belts properly before you drive off!
using seat belts
rrectly, they can reduce the risk of
elt as described in this booklet.
lts can be fastened at all times and are not
incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- rotection from seat belts can be achieved only
altea_EN Seite 23 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Seat belts protection
Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the
event of an accident.
Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting posi-
tions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an accident.
Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to
severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the danger of
being thrown from the car.
Passengers wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability
of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other
passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to
absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these
features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of
injury.
Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts
substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is
why it is so important to faste
driving around the corner".
Ensure that your passengers
have shown properly that we
tially reducing the risk of inju
serious accident. Furthermor
tion provided by airbags in th
a seat belt is required by law
Although your vehicle is equi
fastened and worn. The front
frontal accidents. The front ai
collisions, minor side collisio
airbag trigger threshold valu
Therefore, you should always
passengers have fastened th
Safety instructions on
If seat belts are used co
injury in an accident.
Always wear the seat b
Ensure that the seat be
damaged.
WARNING
If the seat belts are worn ries increases. The optimal p if you use them properly.
Fig. 11 Driver wearing the seat belt properly: is secured by the belt in sharp braking
Seat belts24
damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.
ean, otherwise the retractors may not work
nt and rear occupants are locked into
its full protection if the belt web is not
Fig. 12 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt
altea_EN Seite 24 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The other passengers must also wear the seat belt, otherwise they may be danger of injury!
The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not posi- tioned correctly.
Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.
Keep both feet in the foot-well in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
The belt webbing must never be twisted while it is being worn.
The belt webbing should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.
Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the belts, reducing their capacity to protect.
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.
Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an acci- dent. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regular intervals.
Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a qualified workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.
Do not attempt to repair a must not be removed or mod
The belts must be kept cl properly page 217.
Seat belts
Seat belt adjustment
The seat belts for the fro
position by a latch.
The seat belt cannot offer
positioned correctly.
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Seat belts 25
Safety Fir Technical Data
ximum protection only when they are
Fig. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front
Fig. 14 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side
altea_EN Seite 25 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly
across your chest and lap.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and
push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click
page 24, fig. 12.
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in
the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder
strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled
slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in mountains or bends
and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with belt tension
devices page 28.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.
Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is increased.
If an occupant is incorrectly belted in, the belt cannot protect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned belt web can cause extremely severe injuries.
Always engage the retractor lock when you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 page 46.
Seat belt position
Seat belts offer their ma
properly positioned.
Seat belts26
also fasten their seat belts properly
he unborn child is for the mother to
rly at all times during the pregnancy.
imum protection only when the belt web
age 25.
d head restraint correctly page 10.
pull the belt evenly across your chest and
the pelvis fig. 15.
to the buckle for the corresponding seat
it is securely locked with an audible click
hat the latch plate is securely engaged in
Fig. 15 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy
altea_EN Seite 26 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder
region:
belt height adjustment for the front seats.
front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso page 25, fig. 13.
The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis page 25, fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.
Read and observe the warnings page 23.
Pregnant women must
The best protection for t
wear the seat belt prope
The seat belt provides max
is properly positioned p
Adjust the front seat an
Holding the latch plate,
as low as possible over
Insert the latch plate in
and push it down until
.
Pull the belt to ensure t
the buckle.
Seat belts 27
Safety Fir Technical Data
hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim
hile the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you ng severe or fatal injuries.
height
rs can be used to adjust the position
houlder.
the front seats can be used to adjust the
shoulder.
Fig. 17 Location of the belt height adjuster
altea_EN Seite 27 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.
For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.
Read and observe the warnings page 23.
Seat belt release
The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has
come to a standstill.
Press the red button on the belt buckle fig. 16. The latch plate
is released and springs out .
Guide the belt back by
is not damaged
WARNING
Never unbuckle a seat belt w increase the risk of sustaini
Adjusting the seat belt
Seat belt height adjuste
of the seat belt at the s
The seat belt adjuster for
proper belt position at the
Fig. 16 Removing latch plate from buckle
Seat belts28
es
sion device
, the seat belts on the front seats are
upants are equipped with belt tension devices.
nsion devices during severe head-on, lateral
seat belt is being worn. This retracts and
ng the forward motion of the occupants.
triggered only once.
ot be triggered in the event of a light frontal,
hicle overturns, or in situations where no large
rear of the vehicle.
are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is
ion of fire in the vehicle.
ments must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. A qualified workshop is familiar with
pleased to pass on the information to you.
belt tension devices
omponents of the seat belts that are installed
you work on the belt tension devices or remove
when performing other repair work, the seat
sequence may be that, in the event of an acci-
function incorrectly or not at all.
altea_EN Seite 28 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Press the upper part of the shoulder belt guide and hold it in this
position page 27, fig. 17.
Move the shoulder belt guide up or down until you have adjusted
the seat belt page 25.
After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharply to check that the
catch on the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
Incorrectly fastened seat belts
Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe injuries.
Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is
properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order
described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs
substantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe
or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially
increased when a deploying airbag strikes an occupant who has
assumed an incorrect sitting position. As driver, you are responsible
for all vehicle occupants, especially children. Therefore:
Never permit anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in
the vehicle while travelling .
WARNING
An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.
Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them during the trip.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of seat belts page 23.
Belt tension devic
Function of the belt ten
During a frontal collision
retracted automatically.
The seat belts for the front occ
Sensors will trigger the belt te
and rear collisions only if the
tightens the seat belts, reduci
The belt tension device can be
The belt tension devices will n
side or rear collision, if the ve
forces act on the front, side or
Note If the belt tension devices
normal and it is not an indicat
The relevant safety require
components of the system are
these regulations and will be
Service and disposal of
The belt tension devices are c
in the seats of your vehicle. If
and install parts of the system
belt may be damaged. The con
dent, the belt tension devices
Seat belts 29
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 29 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
So that the effectiveness of the belt tension device is not reduced and that
removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula-
tions, which are known to the qualified workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the belt tension devices are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increases. The belt tension devices may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt tension devices or seat belts.
The belt tension device and seat belt including its automatic retractor cannot be repaired.
Any work on the belt tension devices and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a qualified workshop only.
The belt tension devices will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed it they have been activated.
Airbag system30
t critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This
possible distance between yourself and the
t airbags can completely deploy when trig-
m protection.
at will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci-
d the speed of the vehicle.
red depends primarily on the vehicle deceler-
ollision and detected by the control unit. If the
during the collision and measured by the
specified reference values, the front, side
be triggered. Take into account that the visible
in an accident, for whatever reason, is not an
gs had been triggered.
orrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting posi- al injuries.
hildren, who are not properly belted can s if the airbag is triggered. You should always years of age on the rear seat. Never transport are not restrained or the restraint system is
, size or weight.
at belt, if you lean forward or to the side while rect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury will be further an inflating airbag.
y from an inflating airbag, always wear the .
altea_EN Seite 30 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Airbag system
Brief introduction
Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the
seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting
position must be assumed.
For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please ensure
the following before driving:
Always wear the seat belt properly page 19.
Adjust the driver's seat and the steering wheel correctly
page 10.
Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.
Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.
Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your
vehicle page 46.
The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an
incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause
you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all passengers in the vehicle
assume a correct sitting position while travelling.
A sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat
belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,
the inflating airbag may inflic
also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest
front airbag. This way, the fron
gered, providing their maximu
The most important factors th
dent, the angle of collision an
Whether the airbags are trigge
ation rate resulting from the c
vehicle deceleration occurring
control unit remains below the
and/or curtain airbag will not
damage in a vehicle involved
indication as to why the airba
WARNING
Wearing the seat belt inc tion can lead to critical or fat
All occupants, including c sustain critical or fatal injurie transport all children up to 12 children in the vehicle if they not appropriate for their age
If you are not wearing a se travelling or assume an incor increased risk of injury. This increased if you are struck by
To reduce the risk of injur seat belt properly page 19
Airbag system 31
Safety Fir Technical Data
ger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat gainst the door, the roof or the backrest.
tances, it is necessary to transport a child in a front passenger seat, it is absolutely essential ng safety measures:
enger airbag page 44, Deactivating
e approved by the child seat manufacturer for seat with front or side airbag.
instructions given by the child seat manufac- fety instructions page 46, Child safety.
ling the child seat, push the front passenger rds so that the greatest possible distance to ag is ensured.
s prevent the front passenger seat from being .
nt passenger seat must be in an upright
g and belt tension device system
itors the airbag and belt tension
ll airbags and belt tension devices in the
ts and wiring connections.
altea_EN Seite 31 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Always properly adjust the front seats.
The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat
Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front
passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.
An enabled front airbag on the front passenger side is potentially a major
danger to a child. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if
he/she is transported in a rear-facing child seat. You should always transport
all children up to 12 years of age on the rear seat.
If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating
airbag can strike it with such great force that critical or fatal injuries may
result.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats.
That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front
passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 44.
When transporting children, use a child seat appropriate to the age and size
of each child page 46.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off,
an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
WARNING
If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increases.
Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal inju- ries when the front passenger airbag is triggered.
An inflating front passen and hurl it with great force a
If, under special circums rear-facing child seat on the that you observe the followi
Disable the front pass airbags*.
The child seat must b use on a front passenger
Follow the installation turer and observe the sa
Before properly instal seat completely backwa the front passenger airb
Ensure that no object pushed completely back
The backrest of the fro position.
Warning lamp for airba
This warning lamp mon
device system.
The warning lamp monitors a
vehicle, including control uni
WARNING (continued) WARNING (continued)
Airbag system32
nd disposal of the airbags
are installed in various places in your vehicle.
m or remove and fit parts of the system when
parts of the airbag system may be damaged.
, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates
at all.
nts must be observed when the vehicle or
scrapped. The specialist workshops and the
miliar with these requirements.
ut by a professional, or if the airbags are used or fatal injuries is increased. The airbags may in the wrong circumstances.
hing on the steering wheel hub or the soft unit on the passenger side of the dashboard, y them in any way.
ch any objects such as cup holders or tele- aces covering the airbag units.
el or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a r clean the dash panel and the airbag module ining solvents. Solvents cause the surface to triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could
djust, remove or install parts of the airbag
stem or removal and installation of the airbag (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should fied workshop. Qualified workshops have the
ation and qualified personnel.
altea_EN Seite 32 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Monitoring of airbag and belt tension device system
Both the airbag and belt tension device systems operation is constantly
monitored electronically. Each time the ignition is switched on, the warning
lamp lights for several seconds and the display in the instrument panel*
shows AIRBAG / TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the warning lamp :
does not light up when the ignition is switched on,
after the ignition is switched on, it turns off after 4 seconds,
it turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on,
lights up or flashes while the car is moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. In
addition, depending on the malfunction, a fault message appears in the
display of the combi-instrument for approx. 10 seconds and a short acoustic
signal is given. In this event, you should have a qualified workshop check the
system immediately.
If any of the airbags are de-activated by the Authorised Service Centre, the
indicator lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off
if there is no fault.
WARNING
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tension device system cannot properly perform its protective function.
If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tension devices may not be triggered, or may not be trig- gered correctly.
Repairs, maintenance a
The parts of the airbag system
If you work on the airbag syste
performing other repair work,
The consequence may be that
incorrectly or does not inflate
The relevant safety requireme
components of the airbag are
Vehicle disposal centres are fa
WARNING
If repairs are not carried o incorrectly, the risk of severe fail to inflate, or could inflate
Do not cover or stick anyt plastic surface of the airbag and do not obstruct or modif
It is important not to atta phone mountings to the surf
To clean the steering whe water-moistened cloth. Neve surface with cleansers conta become porous. If the airbag cause substantial injuries.
Never attempt to repair, a system.
Any work on the airbag sy components for other repairs be performed only by a quali necessary tools, repair inform
Airbag system 33
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 33 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
We strongly recommend you to go to a qualified workshop for all work on the airbag system.
Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system34
is located in the steering wheel fig. 18 and
ger is located in the instrument panel
ed by the word AIRBAG.
elts, the front airbag system gives the front
on for the head and chest in the event of a
e 37, Safety notes on the frontal airbag
ction of restraining the occupants, the seat
ront passenger in a position where the airbags
ion in a frontal collision.
stitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
e safety system. Please bear in mind that the
ffectively when the occupants are wearing their
djusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
e seat belts at all times, not only because this
ntries, but also for your safety page 19,
bag system are:
onitoring system (control unit),
ag with gas generator) for the driver and front
ash panel insert page 31.
s monitored electronically. The airbag warning
onds every time the ignition is switched on
if the warning lamp
ignition is switched on page 31,
ed on, it turns off after 4 seconds,
up again after the ignition is switched on,
he car is moving.
altea_EN Seite 34 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Front airbags
Description of front airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The front airbag for the driver
the airbag for the front passen
fig. 19. Airbags are identifi
In conjunction with the seat b
occupants additional protecti
severe frontal collision pag
system.
In addition to their normal fun
belts also hold the driver and f
can provide maximum protect
The airbag system is not a sub
of the vehicle's overall passiv
airbag system can only work e
seat belts correctly and have a
it is most important to wear th
is required by law in most cou
Brief Introduction.
The main parts of the front air
an electronic control and m
the two front airbags (airb
passenger,
a warning lamp in the d
The airbag system operation i
lamp will light up for a few sec
(self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system
does not light up when the
after the ignition is switch
it turns off and then lights
lights up or flashes while t
Fig. 18 Driver airbag located in steering wheel
Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel
Airbag system 35
Safety Fir Technical Data
bags
the risk of head or chest injury.
d so that the airbags for the driver and front
severe frontal collision.
e front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and
d front passenger fig. 20. The fully deployed
movement of the front occupants and help to
e head and the upper part of the body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag. After the collision, the
r the front occupants to see forward.
d extra protection in an accident, the airbags
idly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust
Fig. 20 Inflated front airbags
altea_EN Seite 35 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The front airbag system will not be triggered if:
the ignition is switched off,
there is a minor frontal collision,
there is a side collision,
there is a rear-end collision,
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Operation of frontal air
Inflated airbags reduce
The airbag system is designe
passenger are triggered in a
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered
deploy in front of the driver an
airbags cushion the forward
reduce the risk of injury to th
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant p
chest are surrounded and pro
airbag deflates sufficiently fo
In order to provide the desire
have to deploy extremely rap
Airbag system36
. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags triggered
altea_EN Seite 36 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered
The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel and dash panel when the
driver and front passenger airbags deploy fig. 21. The airbag covers
remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.
Fig are
Airbag system 37
Safety Fir Technical Data
ags
t a substitute for the seat belts.
ated in the driver seat and front passenger seat
side airbags are located in the rear wheel
are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper
n the rear wheel housing lining.
the side airbag system gives the front seat occu-
or the upper body in the event of a severe side
notes on the operation of the side airbag
rbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on
the body facing the impact. In addition to their
the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also
Fig. 22 Side airbag in driver seat
altea_EN Seite 37 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Safety notes on the frontal airbag system
If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in many kinds of accident.
WARNING
It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the vehicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.
If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a substantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.
Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate restraint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sustain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.
The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
Side airbags*
Description of side airb
The airbag system is no
The front side airbags are loc
backrests fig. 22. The rear
housing lining. The locations
region of the backrests and i
Together with the seat belts,
pants additional protection f
collision page 40, Safety
system.
In a side collision, the side ai
the front seats to the areas of
normal function of protecting
Airbag system38
door panels have been removed or if the ly fitted.
the loudspeakers in the door panels have les left by the loudspeakers have been
enings are closed or covered if loudspeakers in the interior door panels.
e doors should be made in a qualified author-
s can only provide maximum protection if the ly page 10, Proper sitting position for
he airbag system, have the system checked orkshop. Otherwise, during a side collision, r, or not trigger correctly.
altea_EN Seite 38 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
hold the passengers in the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position
where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times,
not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your
safety page 19, Brief Introduction.
The side airbag system will not be triggered if:
the ignition is switched off,
there is a minor side collision,
there is a frontal collision,
there is a rear-end collision,
the vehicle turns over.
The main parts of the airbag system are:
an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit),
The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear side
airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing.
a warning lamp in the dash panel insert page 31.
The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag warning
lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on
(self-diagnosis).
WARNING
In a side-on collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.
Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.
Never drive if the interior panels have not been correct
Never drive the vehicle if been removed, unless the ho correctly closed.
Always check that the op or other equipment are fitted
Any work carried out to th ised workshop.
The seat belts and airbag occupants are seated correct occupants.
If a fault has occurred in t immediately by a qualified w the system may fail to trigge
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 39
Safety Fir Technical Data
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
uts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
altea_EN Seite 39 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Function of side airbags
Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
many side impact collisions.
In some side collisions the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the
vehicle fig. 23.
In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig-
gered together.
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.
In order to provide the desired extra protection in an accident, the airbags
have to deploy extremely rapidly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust
may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
tion of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the
front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the
upper body.
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant p
chest are surrounded and pro
Fig. 23 Inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle
Airbag system40
incorrect sitting position, they expose them- f injury in the event of an accident. This is ild is travelling on the front passenger seat gered in an accident; this could have critical us injury or death page 46, Child safety.
ag system or removal and installation of the repairs (such as removal of the front seat) a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may m operation.
components of the airbag system in any way.
s are managed through sensors located in the ensure the correct functioning of the side and rs nor the door panels should be modified in kers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag
ly. All work carried out on the front door must hop.
altea_EN Seite 40 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system
If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the
risk of injury in side impact collisions.
WARNING
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.
In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.
Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.
Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over the driver seat or front passenger seat unless the covers have been expressly approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 218, Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications.
Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a qualified workshop.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
When children assume an selves to an increased risk o particularly the case if the ch and the airbag system is trig consequences including serio
Any work on the side airb airbag components for other should only be performed by occur during the airbag syste
Do not attempt to modify
The side and head airbag interior of the front doors. To head airbags neither the doo any way (e.g. fitting loudspea system may not work correct be made in a qualified works
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system 41
Safety Fir Technical Data
untries, but also for your safety page 19,
airbag system are:
monitoring system (control unit),
gs with gas generator) for the driver, front
n the rear seats,
dash panel insert page 31.
is monitored electronically.
ll not be triggered
ff,
g. 24 Location of left curtain airbag
altea_EN Seite 41 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Curtain airbags
Description of curtain airbags
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors
fig. 24 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the occu-
pants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a
severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the
curtain airbag system.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part
of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the
airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore,
it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this
is required by law in most co
Brief Introduction.
The main parts of the curtain
an electronic control and
the curtain airbags (airba
passenger and passengers o
a warning lamp in the
The airbag system operation
The curtain airbag system wi
the ignition is switched o
Fi
Airbag system42
e curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side
e front, side and curtain airbags may be trig-
the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the
rs the side windows and door pillars.
extra protection in an accident, the airbags
ly (within thousandth of a second). A fine dust
deploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
hion the movement of the front occupants and
y to the upper body.
ag allows the controlled escape of the propel-
ts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and
tected by the airbag.
ration of the curtain airbag system
tly, they can considerably reduce the
ds of accident.
gs to provide their maximum protection, the ust always be maintained with seat belts
ad air bag must be disconnected in those ger compartment separation screen. See an make this adjustment.
altea_EN Seite 42 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
there is a frontal collision,
there is a rear-end collision,
if the vehicle rolls,
during a minor side collision,
WARNING
If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked imme- diately by a qualified workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.
Function of curtain airbags
Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in
a side collision.
During some side collisions th
of the vehicle fig. 25.
In certain types of accident th
gered together.
When the system is triggered,
process, the curtain bag cove
In order to provide the desired
have to deploy extremely rapid
may develop when the airbag
tion of fire in the vehicle.
The fully deployed airbags cus
help to reduce the risk of injur
The special design of the airb
lant gas when an occupant pu
chest are surrounded and pro
Safety notes on the ope
If you use airbags correc
risk of injury in many kin
WARNING
In order for the side airba prescribed sitting position m fastened while travelling.
For safety reasons, the he vehicles fitted with a passen Authorised Service Centre to
Fig. 25 Deployed curtain airbags
Airbag system 43
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 43 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occu- pants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain airbags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 218, Accessories, replacement of parts and modifica- tions.
The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.
The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.
Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a qualified workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.
Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.
The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct functioning of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be made in a qualified workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Airbag system44
g is deactivated, this means that only the
d. All the other airbags in the vehicle
airbag
in the key operated switch in the glove
fig. 26.
lamp OFF on the instrument panel
en the ignition is switched on .
irbag
in the key-operated switch in the glove
fig. 26.
Fig. 27 Warning lamp for deactivated passenger airbag in centre console
altea_EN Seite 44 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Deactivating airbags*
Disabling front passenger airbag
If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat,
the front passenger airbag must be de-activated.
When the passenger airba
frontal airbag is deactivate
remain functional.
Disabling front passenger
Switch the ignition off.
Turn the ignition switch
box to the position OFF
Check that the warning
fig. 27 remains lit wh
Enabling front passenger a
Switch the ignition off.
Turn the ignition switch
box to the position ON
Fig. 26 In the glovebox: key for enabling and disa- bling front passenger airbag
Airbag system 45
Safety Fir Technical Data
er the front passenger airbag will deploy all your passengers of this.
key to activate / deactivate the passenger front ront airbag will be activated / deactivated. The on the passenger side will remain active.
altea_EN Seite 45 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Check that the warning lamp on the instrument panel does
page 44, fig. 27 not light up when the ignition is switched on
.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.
You should deactivate the front passenger airbag only when, in excep- tional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat page 46, Child safety
Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This represents a risk of fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary in exceptional circumstances to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, you must always disable the front passenger airbag.
As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger airbag again.
Only deactivate the passenger airbag when the ignition is off, other- wise a fault may occur in the airbag system, this will create a danger that in case of an accident, the airbag does not deploy properly or does not deploy at all.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, if the warning lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up when the front passenger airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system:
Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a qualified work- shop.
Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front passenger airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal inju- ries.
It is predictable wheth during an accident! Warn
When using the ignition airbag, only the passenger f side airbag and head airbag
WARNING (continued)
Child safety46
together with the on-board documentation,
instructions manual.
altea_EN Seite 46 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Child safety
Brief introduction
Introduction
Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear
seat than on the front passenger seat.
We recommend that children under 12 years of age are transported on the
rear seats. Children travelling on the rear seat must use a child restraint
system or the seat belts provided, depending on their age, height and
weight. For safety reasons, the child restraint system should be installed in
the centre of the rear seat or behind the front passenger's seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to
children. page 21, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do
not have muscle and bone structures fully developed. This means that chil-
dren are subject to a greater risk of injury.
To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Genuine Acces-
sories Program, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke2).
These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with
the ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and observe
page 47, Safety notes on using child seats.
We recommend you to include
the manufacturer's Child Seat
2) Not for all countries
Child safety 47
Safety Fir Technical Data
bies on your lap, this can result in potentially
transported in a vehicle without being properly eel on a seat while travelling. In an accident,
ugh the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries her passengers.
proper sitting position when the car is moving, greater risk of injury in the event of sudden accident. This is particularly important if the t passenger seat and the airbag system is trig- could cause serious injury or even death.
protect your child!
ised child alone on a child seat or in the
nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold be fatal.
an 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat t system, as this could cause injuries to the uring a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
bbing to become twisted or jammed, or to rub
lts can cause injuries even in a minor collision uvres.
aximum protection only when the belt web is 24, Seat belts.
py a child seat page 48, Child seats.
altea_EN Seite 47 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Safety notes on using child seats
Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of
injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in
your vehicle.
Protect your children by properly using appropriate child seats
page 48.
Always ensure that the belt webbing is properly positioned
according to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
child seat.
When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traffic.
Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least
every two hours.
WARNING
Never install a child seat facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could lead to a risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in exceptional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled page 44, Deactivating airbags*. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.
For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to turn the airbag off, an Authorised Service Centre must be consulted.
All passengers, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.
Never hold children or ba fatal injuries to the child!
Never allow a child to be secured, or to stand up or kn the child could be flung thro to themselves and to the ot
If children assume an im they expose themselves to braking manoeuvre or in an child is travelling on the fron gered in an accident; as this
A suitable child seat can
Never leave an unsuperv vehicle.
Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can
Children who are less th belt without a child restrain abdominal and neck areas d accident.
Do not allow the belt we on any sharp edges.
Incorrectly worn seat be or in sudden braking manoe
The seat belt provides m properly positioned page
Only one child may occu
WARNING (continued)
Child safety48
ats
a correctly adjusted seat belt can
child.
t 9 months old and 10 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration fig. 28.
ut 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most
aring in the illustration.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
ing child seats.
together with the on-board documentation,
instructions manual.
ormation and warnings concerning the use of notes on using child seats on page 47.
Fig. 28 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
altea_EN Seite 48 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Child seats
Categorisation of child seats into groups
Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable
for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R. It means that:
Economic Commission for Europe Regulation
The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:
Group 0: Children up to 10 kg
Group 0+: Children up to 13 kg
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg
Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg
Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard
bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number
below it).
Group 0 and 0+ child se
A suitable child seat and
help you to protect your
Group 0: For babies from abou
suitable seats are those appe
Group 0+: For babies from abo
suitable seats are those appe
Follow the manufacturer's ins
ments when installing and us
We recommend you to include
the manufacturer's Child Seat
WARNING
Read and always observe inf child seats in Safety
Child safety 49
Safety Fir Technical Data
ats
d a correctly adjusted seat belt can
r child.
tructions and observe any statutory require-
ing child seats.
e together with the on-board documentation,
t instructions manual.
weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best
ats together with properly adjusted seat belts.
eighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5
by seat cushions with head restraints together
fig. 30.
Fig. 30 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat.
altea_EN Seite 49 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Group 1 child seats
A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can
help you to protect your child.
Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the
rear of the car are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing
between 9 and 18 kg.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require-
ments when installing and using child seats.
We recommend you to include together with the on-board documentation,
the manufacturer's Child Seat instructions manual.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
Group 2 and 3 child se
A suitable child seat an
help you to protect you
Follow the manufacturer's ins
ments when installing and us
We recommend you to includ
the manufacturer's Child Sea
Group 2 child seats
Children under 7 years of age
protected by group 2 child se
Group 3 child seats
Children over 7 years of age w
metres tall are best protected
with properly worn seat belts
Fig. 29 A category 1 forward-facing child seat fitted on the rear seat.
Child safety50
altea_EN Seite 50 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
WARNING
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 24, Seat belts.
Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.
Child safety 51
Safety Fir Technical Data
n must be secured in the vehicle with a r age, weight and size.
facing backwards (or rear-facing) on the front ront passenger airbag has been disabled. This the child! However, if it is necessary, in excep- hild in the front passenger seat, the front ys be disabled page 44, Deactivating t to its highest position, in case it has this
information and warnings concerning the use ty notes on using child seats on page 47.
h the ISOFIX system
FIX system can be secured quickly,
rear outer seats using the system
Fig. 31 ISOFIX securing rings
altea_EN Seite 51 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Securing child seats
Ways to secure a child seat
A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on
the front passenger seat.
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the
following ways:
Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.
Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 with the ISOFIX system can be
secured without fastening seat belts, using the ISOFIX and page 51
securing rings.
U: Suitable for universal approved restraining systems for use in this age
category (universal retention systems are those fitted using the adult
seat belt).
*: Move the passenger seat as far to rear as possible, as high as possible
and always deactivate the airbag.
L: Suitable for retention systems using the ISOFIX anchors
WARNING
When travelling, childre restraint system suitable fo
Never install a child seat passenger seat unless the f could cause fatal injuries to tional cases, to transport a c passenger airbag must alwa airbags* and move the sea adjustment.
Read and always observe of child seats in Safe
Securing child seat wit
The child seat with ISO
easily and safely on the
Category Weight
Seat locations
Front passen- ger
Rear outer Rear centre
Group 0 <10 kg U* U/L U
Group 0+ <13 kg U* U/L U
Group 1 9-18 kg U* U/L U
Group 2 / 3 15-36 kg U* U U
Child safety52
altea_EN Seite 52 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
When removing or fitting the child seat, please be sure to follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
Move the seat as far to rear as it will go.
Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX retaining rings until the
child seat can be heard to engage securely.
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.
Two ISOFIX retaining rings are fitted on each rear seat. In some vehicles, the
rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear
floor. The access to ISOFIX rings is between the rear back rest and the seat.
Child seats with ISOFIX mountings are available in your Authorised Service
Centres.
WARNING
The retaining rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX child seats.
Never secure child seats without the ISOFIX system, retaining belts or objects to the fastening rings this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child.
Ensure that the child seat is secured correctly to the ISOFIX anchors.
53
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 53 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
54
Fig. 3
altea_EN Seite 54 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
2 Instrument panel
Cockpit 55
Safety Fir Technical Data
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
tivated front passenger airbag . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nsole:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
nt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
itch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
lever* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
losing the front windows . . . . . . . . .
157
161
136
44
30
139
178
144
95
195
82
185
148
130
174
183
118
169
167
226
108
altea_EN Seite 55 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Operating instructions
Cockpit
Overview
Overview of the instrument panel
This overview will help you to familiarise yourself with the
controls and displays.
Door release lever
Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighting control for instrument and control lighting . . . . . . . .
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air vent
Turn signal and main beam lever and cruise control system* .
Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dash panel:
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/ and driver front
airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever and operation of
the multi-function display* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left seat heating button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls for
Heating* and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatic* . . . . . . . . .
Climatronic* . . . . . .
Radio/Navigator*
Right seat heating butto
Indication lamp for deac
Front passenger airbag
Glove compartment leve
Gear shift lever . . . . . .
Cup holder compartmen
Controls on the centre co
Central locking . . . .
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre pressure control*
Park Pilot* . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter / Soc
Wing mirror adjustme
Start-Stop* . . . . . . .
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard warning light sw
Pedals
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . .
Steering column control
Handle for releasing the
Button for opening and c
A1
A2 113
A3 117
A4 117
A5
A6 120, 188
A7 87
A8
57
61
77
A9
30
A10
125, 63
A11 136
A12
155
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
Cockpit56
altea_EN Seite 56 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Safety switch* for the rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control* for opening and closing the rear windows . . . . . . . . .
Note Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain
models/model years or are optional extras.
A28 108
A29 108
Cockpit 57
Safety Fir Technical Data
g. 33 Detailed view of instrument panel: Dash panel
altea_EN Seite 57 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Instruments
Instrument overview
The instruments display the vehicle operating status.
Detailed view of instrument panel: Dash panel
Fuel gauge page 58
Multi-function display page 61
Engine coolant temperature gauge page 58
Rev counter page 59
Time adjustment button / trip recorder reset button page 59
Speedometer page 59
Fi
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Cockpit58
ture display
ngine coolant temperature.
heavy engine loads fig. 35.
the needle should be in the middle section of
y also rise when the engine is working hard,
peratures. This is no cause for concern as long
light up and no warning* text appears on the
, fig. 49 will light up if the needle is in the
arning appears on the dash panel display4).
e model.
Fig. 35 Dash panel: engine coolant tempera- ture gauge
A2
altea_EN Seite 58 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Fuel gauge and reserve indicator
Dash panel: fuel gauge
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 litres.
When the needle reaches the reserve zone fig. 34 (arrow), the warning
lamp will light and an acoustic signal will sound reminding the driver to refuel. At this point there are still about 7 litres of fuel in the tank.
The following text appears on the dash panel display3) PLEASE REFUEL [XXX]*
Engine coolant tempera
This gauge shows the e
Needle in cold zone
Avoid high engine speeds and
Needle in normal zone
In normal driving conditions,
the scale. The temperature ma
especially at high outside tem
as the warning lamp does not
dash panel display.
Needle in warning zone
The warning lamp* page 77
warning zone. The following w
3) Depending on the version of the model.
Fig. 34 Dash panel: fuel gauge
4) Depending on the version of th
AA
AB
AC
Cockpit 59
Safety Fir Technical Data
nvironment rs early will help you to save fuel and minimise
d with a digital odometer and a trip counter, in
display.
the instructions shown on page 200 should
k*
ted in the dash panel display.
page 57, fig. 33 clockwise until the
our. The hour will flash. To change the
.
lockwise to the second click to set the
ill flash. To change the minutes, press the
A5
altea_EN Seite 59 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Stop the car and switch off the engine. Check the coolant level page 233
.
Even if the coolant level is correct do not continue driving. You should obtain
technical assistance.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warn- ings page 226.
Caution Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At
high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the
engine overheating.
Rev counter
The rev. counter displays the engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
The start of the red zone page 57, fig. 33 indicates the maximum
engine speed operating at service temperature. However, it is advisable to
change up a into a higher gear, move the selector lever to D or lift your foot
off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone.
Caution The rev counter needle must never enter the red zone on the scale. Risk of
engine damage.
For the sake of the e Changing up into higher gea
engine noise.
Speedometer
The speedometer is equippe
addition to a service intervals
During the running-in period,
be followed.
Setting the digital cloc
The digital clock is loca
Turn the setting knob first click to set the h
hour, press the button
Turn the setting knob c
minutes. The minutes w
button.
A4
Cockpit60
den warning buzz is heard, lamp lights up
is means that there is a fault in the LPG system.
er, press the switch . Take the vehicle
heck the LPG system.
inflammable substance. It may cause severe
avoid any risk of fire or explosion.
in a closed area (for example in a garage), ate ventilation, either natural or mechanical, vent of a leak.
. 36 Centre console: gas system control warning ts and switch.
A2
GAS A1
altea_EN Seite 60 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
LPG system*
LPG gauge
LPG system filler level display
The LPG tank in the spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres at an
outside temperature of 15C. page 221, Refuelling with LPG.
The level of LPG in the tank is shown by the five control lights fig. 36
and . It varies with the outside temperatures.
When the LPG tank is full, the blue lights come on and as the level goes
down the blue lights go out. When the level reaches the reserve, the lamp,
, comes on.
When the LPG tank is empty, a long warning buzz is heard. Warning lamp
comes on and warning lamps flash slowly. To switch off the warning
buzzer, press the switch . Refill with LPG at the earliest opportunity.
If while driving with LPG, a sud
and lamps flash quickly, th
To switch off the warning buzz
to a specialised workshop to c
WARNING
LPG is a highly explosive and burns and other injury.
Due care must be taken to
When parking the vehicle make sure that there is adequ to neutralise the LPG in the e
Fig ligh
AA
AB
AA
AB
A2
AA
GAS A1
AA
Cockpit 61
Safety Fir Technical Data
the dash panel
ng or information texts)
panel shows, amongst other things,
corder as well as the selector lever
age 59. On the right of the display: Selector
the automatic gearbox*. The current position of
gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic)* is high-
le service interval display*.
Fig. 37 Detail of the dash panel insert: screen with different indicators
altea_EN Seite 61 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Note The values shown in the average fuel consumption and the fuel remaining
displays on the MFA display 5) on the dash panel insert are approximate value
only.
Please check the fuel level on the petrol tank fuel level indicator on the
dash panel page 58.
If frequent short journeys are made, especially when the outside temper-
ature is low, the vehicle will tend to run on petrol more often than on LPG.
Therefore, the petrol tank may empty before the LPG tank.
Digital display in
Display (without warni
The display in the dash
the mileage and trip re
position.
Digital clock display p
lever position display for
the selector lever or the
lighted.
Ambient temperature.
Distance display or flexib
5) Optional equipment
A1
A2
A3
Cockpit62
play*
ve fuel.
el. If you are driving in the correct gear, a dot
display. If you are not in the correct gear, an
ear display indicating whether you should
ice Interval Display
isplay registers the total amount of distance
rs the short journeys. The last digit indicates
ecorder counter may be reset by holding down
ig. 33 for a few seconds.
Fig. 39 Gear display
A6
altea_EN Seite 62 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Displayed categories*
The display on the dash panel shows the mileage and trip
recorder as well as the selector lever position.
Clock: Setting the time. On the right of the display: Selector lever posi-
tion display for the automatic gearbox*. The current position of the
selector lever or the gear which is engaged (for Tiptronic) is highlighted.
There are optional and automatic displays in this field.
Optional indicators: e.g. those on the multi-function display (MFD)
Automatic indicators: Information texts and warnings.
Menus providing further information and which can be used to make
diverse settings are also shown: Dash panel menus
Ambient temperature.
Distance display or flexible service interval display.
Recommended gear dis
This display helps to sa
Use the gear display to save fu
will be shown next to the gear
arrow will appear next to the g
change up or down.
Mileage display or Serv
Distance display
The left-hand counter in the d
covered by the vehicle.
The right-hand counter registe
steps of 100 metres. The trip r
the reset button page 57, f
Fig. 38 Digital display in the dash panel
A1
A2
A3
A4
Cockpit 63
Safety Fir Technical Data
tion display (MFD)*
lay (MFD) shows you information on
nsumption.
Fig. 40 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.
Fig. 41 Digital display in the dash panel
altea_EN Seite 63 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Service interval display
A Service pre-warning will appear in the mileage displays if a service is due
soon. A spanner symbol appears and the display km with the distance
that can be driven until the next service appointment is due. The display will
change after approximately 10 seconds. A clock symbol appears and the
number of days until the service appointment should be carried out. The
following message is shown in the dash panel display: SERV. IN... KM OR... DAYS. The service message will disappear approximately 20 seconds after
the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. The normal display can
be resumed by pressing the reset button on the trip counter or by pressing the
rocker switch of the MFI fig. 40 .
With the ignition switched on, you can call up the current service message by
pressing the trip counter reset knob for 2 seconds.
An overdue service is indicated by a minus sign in front of the mileage or day
information.
Display with multi-func
The multi-function disp
the journey and fuel co
AB
Cockpit64
nction display (MFD)*
llowing displays in the multi-function display
switch fig. 42 on the windscreen wiper
Fig. 42 Rocker buttons A and B. Steering wheel controls.
Fig. 43 Digital dash panel display: average fuel consumption indi- cator.
AB
altea_EN Seite 64 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
The multi-function system uses two automatic memories: 1 - Actual memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown
in the upper right-hand corner of the display.
Selecting a memory
When the ignition is on, briefly press button page 63, fig. 40
on the windscreen wiper lever to change from one memory to
another or press button on the steering wheel controls
page 63, fig. 40.
Resetting a memory
Select the memory that you would like to reset.
Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or button
on the steering wheel controls for at least 2 seconds.
The trip memory 1 collects the travel and consumption rates from the
moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is
continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will
be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total memory 2 collects the trip data for any number of individual jour-
neys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours) up to a
total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance travelled.
The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named values is
reached.
Displays in the multi-fu
You can switch between the fo
(MFD) by operating the rocker
lever.
AA
AA
AA AA
Cockpit 65
Safety Fir Technical Data
sing the figures for tank content and current fuel
ar the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
l consumption
n will be shown page 64, fig. 43 after a
0 metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear
The display will be updated every 5 seconds
. The amount of fuel used will not be shown.
fuel consumption
rent fuel consumption in litre/km whilst the
hour when the vehicle is in a stationary position
e how your driving style affects fuel consump-
ends from -45C to +58C. At temperatures
al symbol is displayed and a warning sounds
re than 20 km/h (ice warning). This symbol will
d remains lit until the exterior temperature rises
ready lit.
speed, enter the speed indicator mode and
the display remembers the indicated speed. If
ed, a warning text is displayed on the screen 6)
.
ressing the button (Reset).
ion, the message on the screen may vary and may be
speed indication or by a speed message.
AA
altea_EN Seite 65 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Memory displays
Driving speed
Journey duration
Average speed
Distance
Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
Ambient temperature display
Speed warning
km/h - Driving speed
Driving speed is digitally shown on the display.
min - Journey duration
The display shows the amount of time which has elapsed since the ignition
was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
The memory will automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
km/h - Average speed
The average speed will be shown after running a distance of approximately
100 metres. Dashes will appear in the display until that time. The display will
be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
km - Distance travelled
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1,999 km. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Km - Fuel range
The fuel range is calculated u
consumption. It shows how f
tions as a reference.
litre/100 km - Average fue
The average fuel consumptio
distance of approximately 10
in the display until that time.
while the vehicle is in motion
ltr/100 km or ltr/hr - Current
The display will show the cur
vehicle is in motion or in litre/
with the engine running.
Using this display you can se
tion page 202.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin ext
lower than +4C, an ice cryst
if the vehicle is moving at mo
flash for about 10 seconds an
above +4C or 6C if it was al
Set speed indicator
When driving at the required
press the button (Reset),
the indicated speed is exceed
and a warning signal sounds
This may be deactivated by p
6) Depending on the model vers
represented by flashing of the
AA
Cockpit66
warning or information texts, faults are indi-
ng lamps.
y 1 (red)
he warning lamp will flash or light up and will
ible warnings. This is a danger warning. Stop
ne. Check the fault and correct it. Obtain profes-
.
etected at the same time, the symbols will be
or about 2 seconds at a time and will continue
display for the duration of a priority 1 warning
g reports (red)
ith the warning text STOP BRAKE FLUID AKE FAULT SERVICE MANUAL.
e warning text STOP SEE COOLANT SERVICE
l with the warning text STOP ENGINE OIL UAL.
y 2 (yellow)
e warning lamp lights up, and is accompanied
nction should be checked as soon as possible.
altea_EN Seite 66 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
The speed may be altered using the rocker switch in steps of 5 km/h
within 5 seconds of the initial memory value.
WARNING
There could be black ice on the road surface even if the snowflake symbol is not shown. You should, for this reason, not rely exclusively on this display - Risk of accident!
Note When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature as
a result of the heat radiated from the engine.
Warning or information text in the display
Faults are shown in the display with warning lamps and
warning/information reports.
The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the igni-
tion is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Functional faults are indi-
cated by symbols with warnings and information texts in the display. An
audible warning is given in certain cases.
Warning symbols
There are red warning symbols (priority 1) and yellow warning symbols
(priority 2)
Information text
In addition to warning messages given on a fault, you will receive information
in the display on procedures or will be asked to carry out certain tasks.
Note In the case of screens without
cated exclusively by the warni
Warning reports, Priorit
If one of these faults occurs, t
be accompanied by three aud the car and switch off the engi
sional assistance if necessary
If several priority 1 faults are d
displayed one after the other f
until the fault is corrected.
No menus will be shown in the
report.
Examples of priority 1 warnin
Brake system symbol w
SERVICE MANUAL or STOP BR
Coolant symbol with th
MANUAL.
Engine oil pressure symbo
PRESSURE LOW! SERVICE MAN
Warning reports, Priorit
If one of these faults occurs, th
by one audible warning. The fu
AB
Cockpit 67
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 67 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If several priority 2 warning reports are detected at the same time, the
symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time. After
a set time, the information text will disappear and the symbol will be shown
as a reminder at the side of the display.
Priority 2 warning reports will not be shown until all Priority 1 warning
reports have been dealt with!
Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yellow):7)
Fuel warning light with the information text PLEASE REFUEL.
Windscreen washer fluid symbol with the information text REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID. Refill the windscreen washer tank
page 235.
7) Depending on the version of the model.
Cockpit68
ing will be used as an example of how to
ood idea if you are, for example, using
suited for the top speed of the vehicle.
th the MFD lever
or two seconds to return to main menu
y be necessary to repeat this operation
displayed.
uration with the MFD lever
m the menu, press the upper or lower end
e selected option is displayed between
also be a triangle on the right.
tion.
Fig. 45 Steering wheel controls: button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and switch B to change the menu
altea_EN Seite 68 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Dash panel menus*
Example of menu use
All the menus on the dash panel may be used according to
the following procedure. The dash panel menus may vary
according to the version of the model.
The setting of a speed warn
use the menus. This is a g
winter tyres which are not
1. Open the main menu wi
Switch the ignition on.
Hold down button f
from other menu. It ma
until the main menu is
2. Open the menu Config
To choose an option fro
of the rocker switch. Th
two lines and there will
Select menu Configura
Fig. 44 Windscreen wiper lever: button A to confirm the menu selection and rocker switch B to change the menu
AB
Cockpit 69
Safety Fir Technical Data
uipment one or more of these menus will be
f menu displayed
ent set speed is displayed
s will be shown if the function is deactivated.
nction is activated or deactivated
value increases by 10 km/h
value decreases by 10 km/h
u Winter tyres is closed and the last dis-
enu is shown.
altea_EN Seite 69 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Press button on the windscreen wiper lever. The Configura- tion menu is opened.
2. Access the Configuration menu with the steering wheel controls
To access the Configuration menu, press button
page 68, fig. 45 until the menu is displayed. Now you are in
this menu.
3. Open the main menu Winter tyres
Select option Winter tyres using switch .
Press button . The menu Winter tyres is opened.
4. Program a speed limit warning
Use switch to select the menu entry +10 km/h or -10 km/h
and press button to either increase or decrease the set speed.
5. To activate and deactivate the speed limit warning
Use switch to select the menu point On / Off and press the
button to switch the speed warning on or off. If the speed
warning is deactivated, three dashes will be displayed ---
6. To close the menu Winter tyres
In the menu select Back.
The function Winter tyres sends an optical and an acoustic signal when the
vehicle reaches the set speed.
Example menu Winter tyres
Note For electronic and vehicle eq
displayed.
AA
AC
AB
AA
AB
AB
AB
On the display Winter tyres
Function Name o
X km/h The curr
or --- or dashe
On / Off If the fu
+10 km/h The set
-10 km/h The set
Back The men
played m
Cockpit70
t button for at least 2 seconds. It may
this operation until the main menu is
in menu
m the menu, press the upper or lower end
e selected option is displayed between
ct the entry.
68
Function
the multi-function display (MFD): Multi-
isplay (MFD)
t station will be shown when the radio is
on.
is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a
n system. The navigation system must be
on. When the route guidance is activated, the
rows and proximity bars are displayed. The
similar to that of the Navigation system.
e guidance is not activated, the direction of
pass) and the name of the street along
are driving are shown.
AB
altea_EN Seite 70 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Main menu
The menu provides access to the different display functions
(only with the MFD lever).
Open main menu
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the ejec
be necessary to repeat
displayed.
Select a menu from the ma
To choose an option fro
of rocker switch . Th
two horizontal lines.
Press button to sele
Example of menu use page Fig. 46 Windscreen wiper lever (MFD): button A to confirm the menu selec- tion and rocker switch B to change the menu
Fig. 47 Digital dash panel display: Main menu
Main menu
Multi-function display
Change to
function d
Audio The curren
switched
Navigation This menu
navigatio
switched
turning ar
display is
If the rout
travel (com
which you
AB
AA
Cockpit 71
Safety Fir Technical Data
menu (MFD)
lay (MFD) shows you information on
nsumption.
FD) has two automatic memories: 1 - Trip y. The selected memory is shown on the upper
lay fig. 48 at all times.
ay menu
display menu from the main menu page 70
on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunc-
ory to another, briefly press button
ge 68 on the windscreen wiper lever or the
ion lever page 68, fig. 45 page 68 while
n.
Fig. 48 Multifunction display (MFD) dash panel display.
AA
OK
altea_EN Seite 71 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Note For electronic and vehicle equipment one or more of these menus will be
displayed.
Multi-function display
The multi-function disp
the journey and fuel co
The multifunction display (M
memory and 2 - Total memor right hand section of the disp
Open the multifunction displ
Select the Multifunction and press the button
tion lever*.
Selecting a memory
To change from one mem
page 68, fig. 44 pa
button on the multifunct
the ignition is switched o
Telephone This menu is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a
telephone mounted by the manufacturer: Fixed tele-
phone installation
Vehicle condition This menu displays current warning or information
texts: Vehicle status menu
This option flashes when one of these texts is dis-
played.
Configuration This option allows the time, the speed warning when
using winter tyres, units, language, independent heat-
ing, the Light and visibility menu and the Convenience
menu to be reset.
OK
Cockpit72
displays are shown on the dash panel display
function Display Data from the Configuration
ted or deactivated individually by marking the
he button on the windscreen wiper lever or
eel*.
t of time which has elapsed since the ignition
both memories is 19 hours and 59 minutes.
be deleted once this value has been reached.
100km or l/h
nt fuel consumption in mpg whilst the vehicle
hen the vehicle is in a stationary position with
how your driving style affects fuel consump-
km
will be shown after a distance of approximately
. Dashes will appear in the display until that
ted every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in
ed will not be shown.
ing the figures for tank content and current fuel
r the vehicle can travel using the same condi-
OK
altea_EN Seite 72 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Resetting a memory
Select the memory where you wish to erase the values.
Hold down button on the windscreen wiper lever or the button on
the multifunction* steering wheel for at least 2 seconds.
The journey memory 1 collects the travel and consumption data from the
moment the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is
continued within two hours of switching off the ignition, the new values will
be added to the existing trip recorder memory. The memory will automatically
be deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than two hours.
The total journey memory 2 collects the journey data for any number of indi-
vidual journeys (even if the ignition is switched off for longer than two hours)
up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes travel time or 1999 km distance
travelled. The memory will automatically be deleted if one of the named
values is reached.
Memory indications
The following data can be viewed on the multifunction display using the
rocker switch page 68, fig. 44 page 68 on the windscreen wiper
lever or by pressing button or page 68, fig. 45 on the multifunction
steering wheel*.
Duration
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Distance to empty (the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel)
Distance
Average speed
Digital display of speed8)
Speed warning to --- km/h
Personal selection of display
The driver can establish which
as required:
Select the submenu Multi menu page 74.
The displays can be activa
required option and pressing t
the multifunction steering wh
Duration in h and min
The display shows the amoun
was switched on.
The maximum display value in
The memory will automatically
Current fuel consumption in l/
The display will show the curre
is in motion or in litres/hour w
the engine running.
Using this display you can see
tion page 167.
Average consumption in l/100
The average fuel consumption
100 metres has been travelled
time. The display will be upda
motion. The amount of fuel us
Fuel range in km
The fuel range is calculated us
consumption. It shows how fa
tions as a reference.
8) It is not possible to see whether the alternative speed display is activated.
AA OK
AB
Cockpit 73
Safety Fir Technical Data
he road surface even if the snowflake symbol r this reason, not rely exclusively on this
ent panels; therefore the multifunction display
nary or travelling at very low speeds, the
e slightly higher than the actual ambient
heat radiated from the engine.
ion steering wheel* do not have buttons on the
ultifunction display can only be controlled from
tion steering wheel*.
ing or information texts
enu
cle status from the main menu: Main
n on the windscreen wiper lever
on the multifunction steering wheel*
il the Vehicle Status menu is displayed.
nd information texts: Information and warning
automatically disappear from the screen after a
Vehicle status menu.
OK AA
altea_EN Seite 73 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Distance travelled in km
The display shows the distance travelled since the ignition was switched on.
The maximum display value in both memories is 1999 km. The memory will
automatically be deleted once this value has been reached.
Average speed in km/h
The average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100
metres has been travelled. Dashes will appear in the display until that time.
The display will be updated every 5 seconds while the vehicle is in motion.
Digital display of speed
The dash panel display gives the speed in digital format8) .
Speed warning to --- km/h
This function may help you to keep within the speed limits. Press the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the multifunction steering wheel*
to select the current speed. The dash panel display gives the selected speed,
for example, Speed warning 120 km/h. You have five seconds to reset the
speed between 30 km/hand 250 km/h using rocker switch or buttons
or on the multifunction steering wheel*. Press the button or wait five
seconds until the speed is stored and the warning is activated. If the set
speed is exceeded, an acoustic signal is heard and a warning message is
displayed until the speed is reduced to at least 4 km/h below the stored
speed. The function is switched off by pressing the button again. Speed warning --- km/h is now displayed on the dash panel.
Ambient temperature display
The measurement margin ranges from -40C (-40F) to +50C (+125F). At
outside temperatures below +4C (+39.2F), a snowflake symbol (ice
warning) appears in addition to the outside temperature display. This symbol
flashes for a few seconds and remains lit until the outside temperature rises
above +6C (+42.8F).
WARNING
There could be black ice on t is not shown. You should, fo display - Risk of accident!
Note There are different instrum
may vary.
When the vehicle is statio
temperature displayed may b
temperature as a result of the
Vehicles with a multifunct
windscreen wiper lever. The m
the buttons on the multifunc
Vehicle status menu
This menu shows warn
Open Vehicle Condition m
Select the option Vehi menu and press butto
page 70, fig. 46 or
Press button or
page 68, fig. 45 unt
Priority 2 warning messages a
messages on the screen will
time and will be stored in the
OK
AA
AB
OK
OK
Cockpit74
equipment one or more of these menus will be
this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle
g settings.
ours and minutes of the clock and the naviga-
ystem can be changed. Choose between 12 or
ur format and change to summer time.
enu allows the setting of a speed at which an
l and acoustic warning will be given by the
. You can use this function, for example, if
ve fitted winter tyres which are not suited for
p speed of your vehicle. Please see the sec-
Wheels and tyres.
isplay texts and the navigation system texts
seen in different languages.
ption allows you to select the units for dis-
g temperature, fuel consumption values and
ces.
ash panel also displays the speed in another
nt unit of measurement (mph or km/h) to that
on the speedometer.
lt service messages and reset service interval
y here.
anufacturer's predefined values for the func-
of this menu are restored.
turns to the main menu
ver is used (MFD).
altea_EN Seite 74 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
The warning and information texts may be viewed in this menu. If there is no
warning or information message, the option Vehicle status is not displayed.
If there are several messages, each one is shown for a few seconds.
Example of menu use page 68.
Note If there are no warning messages, this menu is not available.
Configuration menu
This menu is used to make the settings for the vehicle func-
tions.
Open Configuration menu
Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main
menu and press button page 68, fig. 44 on the wind-
screen wiper lever or
Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 68, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Example of menu use page 68
Note For electronic and vehicle
displayed.
Displayed on the screen
Function
Multifunction dis- play data.
This menu is used to establish the data in the multi-
function display menu to be displayed on the dash
panel page 71
Convenience This menu allows you to make the settings for the
convenience functions in the vehicle.
OK AA
Lights and visibility From
lightin
Time The h
tion s
24-ho
Winter tyres The m
optica
system
you ha
the to
tion
Settings: Language The d
can be
Units This o
playin
distan
Aux. Speed The d
differe
given
Inter Service Consu
displa
Manufacturer's set- tings
The m
tions
Backa) This re
a) Only of the windscreen wiper le
Cockpit 75
Safety Fir Technical Data
uipment one or more of these menus will be
Function
door: Individual unlocking activated.
. locking: the doors are automatically locked
the vehicle is travelling at more than approx
/h.
unlock: the doors are unlocked when the key is
ved from the ignition.
ing and closing electric windows: this deter-
s whether to open or close all the windows
the vehicle is unlocked or locked. The open
ion can also be activated for the driver's door
chronised adjustment is selected, when the
r's side wing mirror is adjusted, the passenger
mirror is also moved.
anufacturer's predefined values for the func-
of this menu are restored.
returns to the Configuration menu
altea_EN Seite 75 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
SEAT dealers are able to programme other functions or change the
existing functions depending upon the vehicle equipment.
The Configuration menu is only accessible when the vehicle is at a
standstill.
Convenience menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle conven-
ience settings.
Open menu Convenience
Choose the option Configuration from the main menu and press
the button page 68, fig. 44on the windscreen wiper
lever.
Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 68, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Choose the option Convenience from the main menu and press
the button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use page 68 Note
For electronic and vehicle eq
displayed.
OK AA
AA
Displayed on the screen
Open door One
Auto
when
15 km
Auto
remo
Elec. window control Open
mine
when
funct
only.
Wing mirror adjust. If syn
drive
wing
Manufacturer's set- tings
The m
tions
Back This
Cockpit76
ipment one or more of these menus will be
altea_EN Seite 76 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Lights and visibility menu
From this menu it is it possible to alter the vehicle lighting
settings.
Open Lights and visibility Menu
Select the option Configuration from the main menu: Main
menu and press button page 68 on the windscreen
wiper lever or
Press button or on the multifunction steering wheel*
page 68, fig. 45 until the Configuration menu is displayed.
Select the option Lights & visibility from the menu and press
button on the windscreen wiper lever.
Example of menu use page 68
Note For electronic and vehicle equ
displayed.
Displayed on the screen
Function
Coming Home/ Leaving Home
This option permits the adjustment of the time dur-
ing which the headlamps remain lit after the vehicle
is locked, and also permits the function to be con-
nected and disconnected
Indicator conf. The comfort indicator function can be activated or
deactivated here. With the comfort mode activated,
the indicator will blink at least three times when
turned on.
Manufacturer's set- tings
The manufacturer's predefined values for the func-
tions of this menu are restored.
Back This returns to the Configuration menu
OK AA
AA
Cockpit 77
Safety Fir Technical Data
g. 49 Dash panel with warning lamps. Some of the ms of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain
odels/model years or are optional extras.
altea_EN Seite 77 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Warning lamps
Overview of the warning lamps
The warning lamps indicate a number of different functions and possible faults.
Fi ite m
Cockpit78
g lamps and warning messages can result in mage to your vehicle.
ive page 84
ke applied
fluid level or
e system
page 83
ressure page 84
rol system switched on page 84
ndicator page 84
anical steering page 84
emission control system page 85
electronic stabilisation pro-
P) or the TCS is working or
lit: ESP malfunction or off
page 85
page 168
elector lever lock (automatic page 86
mobiliser page 86
f warning and control lamps Further infor-
mation
altea_EN Seite 78 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
WARNING
Failure to observe warnin serious personal injury or da
Item Symbol Meaning of warning and control lamps Further infor-
mation
Fuel level / reserve page 79
Coolant level / coolant temperature page 79
Rear fog light switched on page 80
Turn signals in operation page 80
Engine fault (petrol engine) page 80
Glow plug system for diesel engine page 80
Main beam switched on page 81
Pollen accumulation in the diesel
engine particulate filter page 81
ABS system fault page 81
Windscreen washer fluid level page 82
Alternator fault page 82
Fasten seat belts! page 19
Tyre pressure page 82
Airbag or belt tension device system
fault or airbag disabled
page 28
page 31
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
Bulb defect
Parking bra
or low brake
fault in brak
Engine oil p
Cruise cont
Door open i
Electromech
Fault in the
If flashing: gramme (ES
deactivated
If it remains
Automatic s
gearbox)
SAFE Electronic im
Item Symbol Meaning o
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
Cockpit 79
Safety Fir Technical Data
rature
s up if the coolant temperature is too
vel is too low.
not go out again after a few seconds.
p or flashes while the vehicle is moving, while
ls are emitted.
olant level is too low or the coolant temperature
following message10): CHECK COOLANT age 233.
erature gauge. The coolant temperature is too
warning area on the dial. Stop the vehicle, it for it to cool down. Check the coolant level.
he overheating may be caused by a malfunction
radiator fan fuse and have it replaced if neces-
again after driving on for a short distance, stop gine off. Contact an Authorised Service Centre
following message11): STOP CHECK COOLANT
he model.
he model.
altea_EN Seite 79 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Use a warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users in order to prevent danger to thirds.
The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before you open the bonnet to work on the engine or in the engine compartment, you must switch the engine off and allow it to cool to reduce the risk of scalding or other kind of injuries. Read and observe the relevant warnings page 226.
Note The appropriate warning lamp for a fault will light up in vehicles without
warning or information texts in the display.
In vehicles with warning or information texts on the screen, the appro-
priate warning lamp for a fault will light up and a warning or information text
will also appear on the screen.
Fuel level / reserve
This symbol lights up to indicate that the fuel tank under the
reserve level.
It lights up when only 7 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Also, an audible warning is given. This serves as a reminder to fill up with fuel at the earliest
opportunity page 220.
The dash panel displays the following message9): PLEASE REFUEL!.
Coolant Level* / tempe
The warning lamp light
high or if the coolant le
There is a fault if:
The warning symbol does
The warning lamp lights u
three acoustic warning signa
This means that either the co
is too high.
Coolant temperature too high
The dash panel displays the
INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL p
First look at the coolant temp
high if the needle is over the
switch the engine off and wa
If the coolant level is correct, t
of the radiator fan. Check the
sary page 261.
If the warning lamp lights up
the vehicle and switch the en or a qualified workshop.
Coolant level too low
The dash panel displays the
INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
9) Depending on the version of the model.
WARNING (continued)
10) Depending on the version of t 11) Depending on the version of t
Cockpit80
icators page 120.
itors the engine management system
nic Power Control) lights up when the ignition
e lamp is working properly. It should go out
nic engine management system while you are
l light up. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
ine fault
up to show that the glow plugs are
there is an engine fault.
while the glow plugs are preheating. When the
gine should be started straight away.
e management system while you are driving,
. Take the vehicle to an Authorised Service
d have the engine checked.
altea_EN Seite 80 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
First look at the coolant temperature gauge. If the needle is in the normal
range, top up with coolant at the earliest opportunity .
WARNING
If your vehicle is immobilised for any technical reasons, move it to a safe distance from traffic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights on and place the warning triangle.
Never open the bonnet if you can see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait until you can no longer see or hear escaping steam or coolant.
The engine compartment is a dangerous area! Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down. Always note the corresponding warnings page 226.
Rear fog light
This warning lamp lights up when the rear fog light is switched on . Further
information page 113.
Turn signals
The warning lamp flashes when the indicators are in opera-
tion.
Depending on which indicator is operating, either the left or right indi-
cator lamp flashes. Both warning lamps will flash at the same time when the
hazard warning lights are switched on.
If any of both indicators fails, the warning lamp will start flashing twice faster
than normal.
Further information on the ind
Engine management*
This warning lamp mon
for petrol engines.
The warning lamp (Electro
is switched on to show that th
once the engine is started.
If there is a fault in the electro
driving, this warning lamp wil
assistance.
Glow plug system / Eng
The warning lamp lights
preheating. It flashes if
Warning lamp is lit
The warning lamp lights up
warning lamp goes off, the en
Warning lamp flashes
If a fault develops in the engin
the glow plug lamp will flash Centre as soon as possible an
Cockpit 81
Safety Fir Technical Data
(ABS)
monitors the ABS.
light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
after the system has run through an automatic
s not light up when the ignition is switched on.
ot go out again after a few seconds.
p when the vehicle is moving.
d in the normal way (except that the ABS control
ase take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as
information on the ABS see the page 193.
e ESP* warning lamp will also light up.
ights up together with the brake warning lamp
ult in the ABS function, but also a possible fault
et, read and observe the warnings on e engine compartment.
p should light up together with the ABS ehicle immediately and check the brake fluid e 239, Brake fluid. If the fluid level has ark you must not drive on. Risk of accident. .
correct, the fault in the brake system may have he ABS system. This could cause the rear
altea_EN Seite 81 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Main beam headlights
This warning lamp lights up when the main beams are on.
The warning lamp is switched on once main beams are on or once the
headlight flasher is operating.
Further information page 120.
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate filter
If the indicator lights you may help the filter clear itself by driving in the
appropriate manner.
To do this, drive about 15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S
gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with the engine running at approximately
2000 rpm. In this way, the pollen build up in the filter is burned. When
cleaning is successful, the indicator turns off.
If the indicator is not deactivated, bring the vehicle to a specialised work-
shop to repair the fault.
WARNING
Always drive according to the road weather conditions, the terrain and traffic. Driving recommendations should never lead to illegal manoeuvres in surrounding traffic.
The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Anti-lock brake system
A warning lamp system
The warning lamp should
switched on. It goes out again
test sequence.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
The warning lamp doe
The warning lamp does n
The warning lamp lights u
The vehicle can still be brake
function will not function). Ple
soon as possible. For further
If a fault occurs in the ABS, th
Brake system fault
If the ABS warning lamp l
, this indicates not only a fa
in the brake system .
WARNING
Before opening the bonn page 226, Working in th
If the brake warning lam warning lamp , stop the v level in the reservoir pag dropped below the MIN m Obtain technical assistance
If the brake fluid level is been caused by a failure of t
Cockpit82
l system controls the tyre speed and
of each tyre.
wheel revolutions and with this information,
ing the ESP sensors. If the diameter of a wheel
icator lights . The wheel diameter changes
t.
ged.
because of a load.
under more pressure (for example, driving with
.
now chains.
tted.
n
Fig. 50 Centre console: tyre monitor system button
altea_EN Seite 82 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
Washer fluid
This warning lamp lights up to indicate that the windscreen
washer level is too low.
This serves as a reminder to fill up the reservoir at the earliest opportunity
page 235
The following message is shown on the dash panel display*12): REFILL WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID.
Alternator
This warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator.
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should go
out when the engine has started running.
If the warning lamp lights up while driving, the alternator is no longer
charging the battery. You should immediately drive to the nearest qualified
workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary
because this will drain the battery.
Tyre pressure
The tyre pressure contro
the frequency spectrum
The tyre monitor 13) compares
the diameter of each wheel us
changes, the tyre monitor ind
when:
Tyre pressure is insufficien
The tyre structure is dama
The vehicle is unbalanced
The wheels of one axle are
a trailer or on extreme slopes)
The vehicle is fitted with s
The emergency wheel is fi
12) Depending on the version of the model.
WARNING (continued)
13) Depending on the model versio
Cockpit 83
Safety Fir Technical Data
rake
s up if the handbrake is applied, if the
o low or if there is a fault in the brake
up if
with the handbrake on, the following message
l display 14): HANDBRAKE ON. Also, an audible
oo low page 239.
following message14): STOP BRAKE FLUID
ake system.
following message14): BRAKE SYSTEM FAULT
p together with the anti-lock brake system
et, read and observe the warnings on
p does not go out, or if it lights up when l page 239, Brake fluid in the reservoir is
p the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain tech-
he model.
altea_EN Seite 83 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The wheel on one axle is changed.
Tyre pressure adjustment
Following the modification to tyre pressure or after changing one or more
wheels, the button page 82, fig. 50 must be kept pressed while the igni-
tion is on until an acoustic signal is heard and the warning lamp goes out.
If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or
heavy load), the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended value
for a full load (see the sticker on the inside of the fuel flap). If the tyre monitor
system button is pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed.
The tyre pressure monitor indicator lights up
If the tyre pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by
the driver, then the tyre control warning lamp lights up .
The tyre pressure monitor indicator flashes
If the tyre pressure indicator flashes, this indicates a fault. Go to the nearest
specialist workshop.
WARNING
When the tyre pressure indicator lights, reduce speed immediately and avoid any sudden manoeuvre or braking. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status.
The driver is responsible for correct tyre pressure. For this reason, tyre pressure must be regularly checked.
Under certain circumstances (for example, in a sports situation, in winter conditions or on a dirt track) the tyre monitor indicator may light or function incorrectly.
Note If the battery is disconnected, the yellow indicator lights up after turning
the ignition on. This should turn off after a brief journey.
Brake system* / handb
The warning lamp light
brake fluid level falls to
system.
This warning lamp lights
If the handbrake is on.
If you drive faster than 6 km/h
will appear on the dash pane
warning is given.
If the brake fluid level is t
The dash panel displays the
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
If there is a fault in the br
The dash panel displays the
INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.
This warning lamp can light u
warning lamp.
WARNING
Before opening the bonn page 226.
If the brake warning lam driving, the brake fluid leve too low. Risk of accident. Sto nical assistance.
14) Depending on the version of t
Cockpit84
llowing message16): STOP ENGINE OIL NUAL.
the oil level is correct, do not drive on. The
le speed. Obtain technical assistance.
s on when the cruise control system
when the cruise control system is switched on.
ntrol system page 188.
s or tailgate*
e of the doors or the tailgate is open.
o off when all the doors are closed correctly.
he ignition is switched off. It should go off
ehicle is locked.
g, the level of steering assistance depends on
e steering angle.
e model.
altea_EN Seite 84 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the control function of the ABS could be out of action. This could cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This could cause the rear to break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical assistance.
Bulb defect
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exte-
rior lighting is defective.
The warning lamp lights up when a bulb in the vehicle's exterior lighting
(e.g. left-hand main beam) is defective.
The dash panel displays the following message15): LEFT FULL BEAM FAULTY.
Engine oil pressure
This warning lamp indicates that the engine oil pressure is
too low.
If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is too
low, add more engine oil page 229.
The dash panel displays the fo
PRESSURE INSTRUCTIONS MA
If the symbol flashes although
engine must not even run at id
Cruise control system*
The warning lamp come
is switched on.
The warning lamp lights up
Further notes on the cruise co
Indicator for open door
This indicator lights if on
The warning light should g
The system also works when t
approx. 15 seconds after the v
Power steering system*
For vehicles with power steerin
the vehicle's speed and on th
15) Depending on the version of the model.
WARNING (continued)
16) Depending on the version of th
Cockpit 85
Safety Fir Technical Data
g driving which has reduced the quality of the
be fault). Reduce speed and drive carefully to
op to have the engine checked.
t displayed in the dash panel display : EXHAUST
programme (ESP)*
itors the electronic stabilisation
ABS, EDL and TCS. This also includes the brake
tic cleaning of the brake discs and the trailer
following functions:
conds when the ignition is switched on while a
out.
activated when driving.
ly if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
ult should occur in the ABS because the ESP
the ABS.
hts up and stays on after the engine is started,
ol system has temporarily switched off the ESP.
activated by switching the ignition off and then
goes out, this means the system is fully func-
, the TCS function deactivates and the warning
altea_EN Seite 85 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The warning lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is
switched on. It should go out once the engine is started.
If the battery is disconnected, the indicator remains lit, even with the engine
running. The warning light only goes off after a distance of approx. 50 m.
There is a fault in the electromechanical steering system if the lamp does not
go out or lights up whilst the vehicle is in motion. The indicator may appear
in two different colours to indicate faults. If it lights yellow, this indicates a
minor fault. If it lights red, seek workshop assistance immediately, if no
assistance is available stop driving. Stop the vehicle and seek technical
assistance. The power steering does not work if the battery is flat or if the
engine is off (for example, for towing). You should take into account that you
will need considerably more power than normal to steer the vehicle if the
steering assistance is reduced or has failed completely.
For those vehicles fitted with ESP* the function Recommended steering
manoeuvre is included. See page 195.
Emission control system*
This warning lamp monitors the exhaust system.
Warning lamp flashes:
When there is misfiring that can damage the catalytic converter. Reduce
speed and drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop to have the
engine checked.
The dash panel displays the following message17): EXHAUST GAS SEE WORKSHOP.
Warning lamp is lit:
If a fault has developed durin
exhaust gas (e.g. lambda pro
the nearest qualified worksh
The following information tex
GAS SEE WORKSHOP.
Electronic stabilisation
This warning lamp mon
programme.
This programme includes the
assist system (BAS), automa
stability programme (TSP).
The warning lamp has the
It will light for about 2 se
test of the function is carried
It flashes when the ESP is
It will light up continuous
It will also come on if a fa
operates in conjunction with
If the ESP warning lamp lig
this may mean that the contr
In this case the ESP can be re
on again. If the warning lamp
tional.
If the ESP button is activated
lamp flashes. 17) Depending on the version of the model.
Cockpit86
e
sed when this warning lamp lights up. This is
gearbox* selector lever is moved out of the
Safe
es if an unauthorised key is used.
at deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
rted into the ignition. The immobiliser will be
as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition
llowing message18): SAFE. The vehicle cannot
70.
tarted if the appropriate coded SEAT genuine
icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
e model.
altea_EN Seite 86 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Differential lock fault (EDL)*
EDL operates along with the ABS in vehicles equipped with an
Electronic Stabilisation Program (ESP)*
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the ABS warning lamp . Please
take the vehicle to a qualified workshop as soon as possible. For further infor-
mation on the EDL page 196, Electronic differential lock (EDL)*.
Traction control system (TCS)*
The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from
spinning when the vehicle is accelerating
The warning lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on and should turn
out after about 2 seconds.
When the TCS is operating while driving, the warning lamp flashes. If the
system is deactivated or if there is any fault in the same, the warning lamp will
remain lit.
It will also come on if a fault should occur in the ABS because the TCS oper-
ates in conjunction with the ABS. For further information, see page 193,
Brakes.
If the TCS button is activated, the TCS function deactivates and the warning
lamp remains lit.
By pressing again, TCS function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched
off.
Operating the foot brak
The footbrake must be depres
necessary when the automatic
positions P or N.
Electronic immobiliser*
This warning lamp flash
Inside the key there is a chip th
matically when the key is inse
activated again automatically
lock.
The dash panel displays the fo
be used in that case page 1
The engine can, however, be s
key is used.
Note A perfect operation of the veh
18) Depending on the version of th
Steering wheel controls 87
Safety Fir Technical Data
the available audio functions from the steering
n, to control the available audio functions and
e steering wheel.
control the Audio system (Radio, CD Audio, CD
io / navigation System, in which case they also
.
rbox* page 181.
Fig. 52 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
altea_EN Seite 87 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Steering wheel controls
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible
to control the audio, telephone and radio navigation functions, and the auto-
matic gearbox*, without needing to distract the driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction module:
Audio version, to control
wheel.
Audio + Telephone versio
the telephone system from th
Both versions may be used to
mp3, CD Changer) and the rad
control the Navigation system
Version for automatic gea
Audio system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 51 Controls on the steering wheel
Steering wheel controls88
AUX table on page 89
Volume up
Volume down
No specified function
No function specified
No function specified
Silence
Operates on Instrument panel display
No function specifiedb)
Operates on Instrument panel display
No function specifiedb)
No function specified
Change menu on instrument panel
No function specified
Change menu on instrument panel
Operates on instrument panel
Change source
Operates on instrument panel
altea_EN Seite 88 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod*
Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward
Search for last station Last track
Hold down:Rewind
No function specified No function specified
Silence Pause
a)
a) Depending on the model version
Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display
Next preset b)
b) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
Next track b)
a) Operates on Instrument panel display Operates on Instrument panel display
Previous preset b) Previous track b)
a) Next preset Change folder
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
a) Previous preset Change folder
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
a) Change source Change source
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
Steering wheel controls 89
Safety Fir Technical Data
Fig. 54 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
X TELEPHONE
e up Volume up
down Volume down
specified No function specified
specified No function specified
ne menu on
t panel
Make call
Accept incoming call
End call
Hold down: reject incoming
call
recognition Enable voice recognition
altea_EN Seite 89 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls
Fig. 53 Controls on the steering wheel
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AU
Volume up Volume up Volum
Volume down Volume down Volume
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward No function
Search for last station Last track
Hold down:Rewind No function
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telepho
instrumen
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
Steering wheel controls90
pecified
Movement on telephone menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
pecified
Movement on telephone menu
Address book / Last calls /
Calls received / Missed calls
instrument
l
Change menu on instrument
panel
instrument
l
Change menu on instrument
panel
rument panel Confirm
rument panel Return to MULTIFUNCTION DIS-
PLAY menu
altea_EN Seite 90 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Next preset a) Next track a) No function s
Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function s
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on
pane
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on
pane
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on inst
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on inst
a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
Steering wheel controls 91
Safety Fir Technical Data
Fig. 56 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
X NAVIGATOR
e up Volume up
down Volume down
specified No function specified
specified No function specified
ne menu on
t panel No function specified
recognition Enable voice recognition
altea_EN Seite 91 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Radio navigation system
Steering wheel audio version controls
Fig. 55 Controls on the steering wheel
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AU
Volume up Volume up Volum
Volume down Volume down Volume
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward No function
Search for last station Last track
Hold down:Rewind No function
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telephone menu on instrument
panel
Access telepho
instrumen
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
Steering wheel controls92
pecified Operates on instrument panel
pecified Operates on instrument panel
instrument
l No function specified
instrument
l No function specified
ument panel Operates on instrument panel
ument panel Operates on instrument panel
Fig. 58 Steering wheel controls (depending on version of model)
altea_EN Seite 92 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Steering wheel Audio + Telephone controls
Next preset a) Next track a) No function s
Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function s
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on
pane
Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on instrument panel Change menu on
pane
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instr
a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
Fig. 57 Controls on the steering wheel
Steering wheel controls 93
Safety Fir Technical Data
NAVIGATOR TELEPHONE
Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down
unction specified No function specified
unction specified No function specified
unction specified
Make call
Accept incoming call
End call
Hold down: reject incom-
ing call
e voice recognition Enable voice recognition
ates on instrument
panel
Movement on telephone
menu
Address book / Last calls
/ Calls received / Missed
calls
ates on instrument
panel
Movement on telephone
menu
Address book / Last calls
/ Calls received / Missed
calls
unction specified Change menu on instru-
ment panel
altea_EN Seite 93 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Button Radio CD/MP3/USB*/iPod* AUX
Volume up Volume up Volume up
Volume down Volume down Volume down
Search for next station Next track
Hold down: Fast forward No function specified No f
Search for last station Last track
Hold down:Rewind No function specified No f
Access telephone menu on
instrument panel
Access telephone menu on
instrument panel
Access telephone menu
on instrument panel No f
Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enable voice recognition Enabl
Next preset a) Next track a) No function specified Oper
Previous preset a) Previous track a) No function specified Oper
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel No f
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
Steering wheel controls94
nction specified Change menu on instru-
ment panel
tes on instrument
panel Confirm
tes on instrument
panel
Return to MULTIFUNCTION
DISPLAY
altea_EN Seite 94 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instrument
panel
Change menu on instru-
ment panel No fu
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument
panel
Opera
Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument panel Operates on instrument
panel
Opera
a) Only if the panel is in Audio menu.
AJ
AK
AL
Unlocking and locking 95
Safety Fir Technical Data
102, fig. 64 on the remote control to lock all
turn the key in the door to lock all doors and the
isabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
lay in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle ly high and low temperatures, depending on g serious injuries/illness. It could even have d lock both the tailgate and all the other doors
vehicle.
with you when you leave the vehicle. Misuse children, may result in serious damage and
entally be started and be out of control.
hed on, the electric equipment could be acti- for example, in the electric windows.
ed using the remote control key. This could t in an emergency situation.
ith you when you leave the vehicle.
m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The y engage, and you would not be able to steer
altea_EN Seite 95 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Unlocking and locking
Central locking
Basic functions
The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all
doors with just pushing on the key button.
Description
Central locking can be activated by using any of the following options:
the key, by inserting it into the driver's door cylinder and rotating it manu-
ally,
the central locking button in the passenger compartment as an electronic
control page 98,
the radio frequency remote control, using the buttons on the key
page 102.
Various functions are available to improve the vehicle safety:
Locking system Safe
Selective unlocking system*
Automatic speed-dependent locking and unlocking system*
Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking
Emergency unlocking system
Unlocking the vehicle*
Press button page 102, fig. 64 on remote control to unlock all the
doors and tailgate.
Locking the vehicle*
Press button page
doors and the tailgate or
tailgate.
WARNING
Never leave children or d gency, they may not be able own.
Never allow children to p can be subjected to extreme the time of year, thus causin fatal consequences. Close an when you are not using the
Always take you car keys of the keys, for example, by accident.
The engine may accid
If the ignition is switc vated with risk of injury,
The doors can be lock make assistance difficul
Always take the key w
Never remove the key fro steering lock could suddenl the vehicle.
Unlocking and locking96
en the vehicle is locked
button on the remote control within
le is locked without activating the dead-
arning lamp flashes for approx. two
out. After approx. 30 seconds it starts
d opened from the inside if the "safe" deadlock
ill have to pull the door release lever once.
ff, the antitheft alarm* page 104 remains
nitoring system* and the anti-tow system are
vehicle if the anti-tow system deadlock mech- is not possible to open the doors from the ake it more difficult to assist vehicle occu- ent. People could become trapped inside in an
tem*
lock either just the driver's door or all
s the unlock button on the remote once. The
le is deactivated, only the driver's door is
and the light indicator are also turned off.
altea_EN Seite 96 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Note While the driver's door is open, the vehicle can not be locked with the
remote control. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle.
If the driver's door is unlocked with the key shaft, only the driver's door is
unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. When the ignition is switched
on, the door "safe" deadlock is deactivated (although the doors remain
locked) and the central locking button is activated. See page 104.
If the central locking or anti-theft alarm are faulty, the driver's door
warning lamp remains lit for approx. 30 seconds after locking the vehicle.
For anti-theft security, only the driver's door is fitted with a lock cylinder.
Safety system Safe*
The "safe" deadlock makes it more difficult to break into the
vehicle because the door release lever and the central locking
button are not active (depending upon country).
Activating deadlock
Press once the locking button on the remote control. or
Turn the key once in the driver's door lock to lock. A warning lamp
in the driver door flashes to indicate the "safe" deadlock is
working. The warning lamp flashes for approx. two seconds at
short intervals and then more slowly.
Deactivating deadlock wh
Press twice the locking
two seconds. The vehic
lock. The driver's door w
seconds and then goes
flashing again.
The doors can be unlocked an
has not been activated. You w
When the "safe" deadlock is o
active. The vehicle interior mo
deactivated*.
WARNING
Nobody should remain in the anism has been activated. It inside. Locked doors could m pants in the event of an accid emergency.
Selective unlocking sys
This system allows to un
the vehicle.
Using the remote control, pres
Safe system for all the vehic
unlocked and both the alarm
Unlocking and locking 97
Safety Fir Technical Data
em for involuntary unlocking*
and prevents the unintentional
.
any of the doors (including the tailgate) are
gets re-locked automatically. This function
aining unlocked if the unlock button is pressed
ystem
uring an accident, the vehicle gets unlocked,
ible to lock the vehicle from inside with the
the ignition off and back on again.
om the outside, see Emergency locking of the
altea_EN Seite 97 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Unlocking all doors and the boot
The unlock button on the remote must be pressed twice so that all doors
and the boot can be opened.
Press twice within 2 seconds to deactivate the Safe system for all vehicle,
to unlock all doors and to use the boot. The indicator and the alarm (only vehi-
cles fitted with one) are turned off.
Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system*
This is a safety system which prevent the access to the vehicle
from the outside when it is running (for example, when
stopped at a traffic light).
Locking
The doors and the boot are automatically locked when vehicle speed exceeds
15 km/h.
If the vehicle is stopped and one of the doors is opened, when the vehicle
moves off again and exceeds a speed of 15 km/h, the unlocked door(s) will
be locked once more.
Unlocking
The driver's door automatically unlocks when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Each door can be unlocked and opened independently from the inside (for
example, when a passenger gets out of it). To do it, simply operate the lever
inside the door.
WARNING
The door handles must not be operated when the vehicle is running: the door would open.
Automatic locking syst
It is an anti-theft system
unlocking of the vehicle
If the vehicle is unlocked and
opened within 30 seconds, it
prevents the vehicle from rem
by mistake.
Emergency unlocking s
If the airbags are triggered d
except for the boot. It is poss
central locking, after turning
If the doors must be locked fr
doors.
Unlocking and locking98
er door cannot be locked if any of the vehicle
open. This avoids the user from forgetting his
central locking will deactivate the central
. Once this time has passed, the button may be
g the key inside the vehicle if the vehicle is
utton when the driver's door is closed and any
ing any of the rear doors, the vehicle locks and
parately from inside the car. Do this by pulling
ildren and disabled people may be trapped
n is not operative in the following cases:
d from the outside (by the remote or the key).
ctivated after unlocking the door lock cylinder
ton .
on .
Manual personalisation
rn the key to unlock for approx. 3 s.
altea_EN Seite 98 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Central locking button
The central locking button allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle from the inside.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button .
Unlocking the doors
Press button .
The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.
Except when the "safe" security system is activated.
Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central locking
button:
Safety reasons make not be possible to open the doors or the tailgate
from the outside (for instance, when stopped at a traffic light).
The driver or front passeng
doors (except the tailgate) are
key inside the vehicle.
Repeated operation of the
locking button for 30 seconds
used once more.
There is a danger of leavin
locked by the central locking b
of the rear doors open. On clos
the keys remain inside it.
All doors can be locked se
the door release lever once.
WARNING
If the vehicle is locked, ch inside it.
The central locking butto
When the vehicle is locke
While the ignition is not a with the key.
Note Vehicle locked, amber but
Vehicle unlocked, red butt
Unlocking and locking -
Activating selective unlocking
With the driver's door open, tu
Fig. 59 Detail of the centre console: central locking system button
Unlocking and locking 99
Safety Fir Technical Data
nually
cylinder and rotate in a clockwise direction for
nti-clockwise for the right hand side door.
ed it can no longer be opened from the outside.
of the remaining doors
e cap fig. 60 printed with a lock image.
ment with a groove in the centre. Insert the key
element clockwise for the right hand side doors
hand side doors.
e door. Once the door has been closed it can no
utside.
rgency) locked driver's door
cylinder and rotate anti-clockwise for the left
se for the right hand side doors.
the door may be opened using the exterior door
ually (emergency) locked doors
e unlocked to gain entry to the vehicle. Operate
he required door. If the child safety lock is acti-
n the interior door release lever is operated the
t open. The exterior door handle may now be
u wish to lock it manually (emergency locking),
ns.
AA
altea_EN Seite 99 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Deactivating selective unlocking
With the driver's door open, turn the key to lock for approx. 3 s.
The indicator lamps flash to confirm activation or deactivation.
Activation of automatic locking
Press the lock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
Deactivation of automatic locking
Press the unlock button on the central locking button for 3 seconds.
The lock button lamp flashes to confirm activation or deactivation.
Emergency manual locking
This permits mechanical locking of the doors in case of
central locking system failure.
Locking the driver's door ma
Insert the key in the door lock
the left hand side door and a
Once the door has been clos
Manual (emergency) locking
Open the door and remove th
This will expose a circular ele
into the groove and rotate the
and anticlockwise for the left
Replace the cap and close th
longer be opened from the o
Unlocking the manually (eme
Insert the key in the door lock
hand side doors and clockwi
The door lock is released and
handle.
Unlocking the remaining man
First the driver's door must b
the internal door handle for t
vated on the rear doors, whe
door is unlocked but does no
used to open the door.
Note Once the vehicle is open, if yo
repeat the previous instructio
Fig. 60 Locking the doors manually
Unlocking and locking100
nt of the vehicle electronic opening and
ects rear doors. It can only be activated
, as described below:
ock
n the door in which you wish to activate
ate the groove in the door using the igni-
he left hand side doors, and anti-clock-
side doors fig. 61 fig. 62.
f lock
the door whose childproof lock you want
ate the groove in the door using the igni-
he right hand side doors, and anti-clock-
ide doors fig. 61 fig. 62.
tivated, the door can only be opened from the
n be activated and deactivated by inserting the
or is open, as described above.
altea_EN Seite 100 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Childproof lock
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being
opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from
opening a door accidentally while the vehicle is running.
This function is independe
locking systems. It only aff
and deactivated manually
Activating the childproof l
Unlock the car and ope
the childproof lock.
With the door open, rot
tion key, clockwise for t
wise for the right hand
Deactivating the childproo
Unlock the car and open
to deactivate.
With the door open, rot
tion key, clockwise for t
wise for the left hand s
Once the childproof lock is ac
outside. The childproof lock ca
key in the groove when the do
Fig. 61 Child safety lock on the left hand side door
Fig. 62 Child safety lock on the right hand side door
Unlocking and locking 101
Safety Fir Technical Data
eys can cause serious injuries.
isabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- to leave the vehicle and not manage on their
e key could start the engine or activate any tric windows), causing risk of accident. The e remote control key. This could make assist-
cy.
ide the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your , damage or theft. Always take the key with you
m the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. ld suddenly block and it would be impossible
nts in the remote control key. Avoid wetting and
altea_EN Seite 101 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Keys
Set of keys
The set of keys includes a remote control, a key without a
remote control and a plastic key tab*.
The set of keys belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:
one remote control key fig. 63 with folding key bit,
one key without remote control ,
a plastic key tab* .
Duplicate keys
If you need a replacement key, take your key tab to an Authorised Service
Centre.
WARNING
An incorrect use of the k
Never leave children or d gency, they may not be able own.
An uncontrolled use of th electric equipment(e.g. elec doors can be locked using th ance difficult in an emergen
Never forget the keys ins vehicle could result in injury when you leave the vehicle.
Never remove the key fro Otherwise, the steering cou to steer the vehicle.
Caution There are electronic compone
hitting the keys Fig. 63 Set of keys
AA
AB
AC
Unlocking and locking102
row) on the control, the key shaft is released.
g. 64 .
64
he button fig. 64 until all indicators
hen the unlocking button is pressed,
e door. Once this time has passed, it will lock
the key fig. 64, will flash.
and the batteries are integrated in the key. The
The maximum scope of the remote control
s. This scope is reduced when the batteries
, is pressed once, the driver's door is
cked.
twice to unlock all doors.
Fig. 65 Range of the remote control:
A1
A2
A3
A3
A1
A1
altea_EN Seite 102 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Radio frequency remote control
Locking and unlocking the vehicle
The remote control key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle
from a distance.
Using the button fig. 64 (ar
Unlocking the vehicle fi
Locking the vehicle fig.
Unlocking the tailgate. Press t
on the vehicle briefly flash. W
you have 2 minutes to open th
once more.
Also, the battery indicator on
The remote control transmitter
receiver is inside the vehicle.
depends on various condition
start to lose power.
Selective unlocking*
When the button fig. 64
unlocked, all others remain lo
Press the button fig. 64
Fig. 64 Assignment of buttons on the remote control key
Unlocking and locking 103
Safety Fir Technical Data
ot flash when the buttons are pushed, the
eries may damage the radio frequency remote
ys replace the dead battery with another of the
nvironment own away in accordance with regulations
e environment.
ote control key
lock or lock the door with the remote
synchronised.
02, fig. 64 button on the remote control.
using the key bit within one minute.
could no longer be opened and closed with the
is repeatedly pressed outside the radio
ctive scope. The remote control key will have to
e available in your Authorised Service Centres,
to the locking system.
ys can be used.
altea_EN Seite 103 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
An improper use of the key can cause serious injuries.
Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emer- gency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle and not manage on their own.
Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. Otherwise, this could result in serious injuries, accidents or even the theft of your vehicle. Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.
An uncontrolled use of the key could start the engine or activate any electric equipment(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The vehicle can be locked when using the remote control key. This could complicate the aid in case of emergency.
Note The radio-frequency remote control can be programmed by means of
pressing the unlocking button once; as a result, only the driver door will
unlock. When the button is pressed once more, all doors and the tailgate will
be unlocked.
The remote control functions only when you are in range page 102,
fig. 65 (red area).
If the vehicle is unlocked using the button, it will lock again auto-
matically if any of the doors or the tailgate are not opened within 30 seconds
after unlocking it. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked
if the unlock button is pressed by mistake.
If the vehicle cannot be opened and closed using the remote control, the
remote control key will have to be re-synchronised page 103.
Changing the battery
If the battery indicator does n
battery must be replaced.
Caution The use of inappropriate batt
control. For this reason, alwa
same size and power.
For the sake of the e The flat batteries must be thr
governing the protection of th
Synchronising the rem
If it is not possible to un
control, it should be re-
Press the page 1
Then close the vehicle
It is possible that the vehicle
remote control if the button
frequency remote control effe
be resynchronised.
Spare remote control keys ar
where they must be matched
Up to eight remote control ke
A1
Unlocking and locking104
the button shown by the (arrow).
oor to unlock the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm
alarm is not triggered immediately.
in 15 seconds. When the ignition is switched
recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates
you do not switch on the ignition within 15
d.
via the unlocking button of the remote control
the ignition lock.
, access is gained to a second secured zone
er a door has been opened), the warning signal
s active even if the battery is disconnected or
ediately if one of the battery cables is discon-
is active.
nction incorporated in the anti-theft
authorized vehicle entry by means of
ensors, 2 emitters and a receptor.
altea_EN Seite 104 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Anti-theft alarm system*
Description of anti-theft alarm system*
The anti-theft alarm triggers if unauthorised movements are
detected around the vehicle.
The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal
it. Audible and visible alarms are triggered if the car is opened using the key,
or if unauthorised access to the vehicle is forced.
The anti-theft alarm system is automatically connected on locking the
vehicle. The system is then primed.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The system triggers an alarm if the following unauthorised actions are carried
out when the car is locked:
Opening the vehicle mechanically using the key and with the ignition off
Opening a door
Opening the bonnet
Opening the tailgate
Switching on the ignition
Movements in the vehicle
Undue manipulation of the alarm
Battery handling
The acoustic signals sound and the indicators flash for approx. 30 seconds.
This may be repeated up to 10 times depending on the country.
Opening the doors mechanically (emergency opening)
If the remote control function fails, you will have to use the key to unlock the
car. This is done as follows:
Unfold the key by pressing
Use the lock on the driver d
system remains active, but an
Switch on the ignition with
on, the electronic immobiliser
the anti-theft alarm system. If
seconds, the alarm is triggere
How to switch the alarm off
When the vehicle is unlocked
or when the key is inserted in
Note If, after the alarm goes off
(e.g. the tailgate is opened aft
is triggered again.
Vehicle monitoring remain
not working for any reason.
The alarm is triggered imm
nected while the alarm system
Volumetric sensor*
Monitoring or control fu
alarm* which detects un
ultrasound.
The system consists of 3 s
Unlocking and locking 105
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 105 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Activation
It is automatically turned on with the anti-theft alarm, when the
vehicle is locked mechanically with the key and when the button
on the remote control is used.
Deactivation
Press the button on the remote control twice. Only the volu-
metric sensor is deactivated. The alarm system remains acti-
vated.
WARNING
The safe security system remains deactivated if the volumetric sensor is deactivated.
For those vehicles in which a separate sunblind is fitted in the passenger compartment, the alarm will not function correctly due to inter- ference with the sensor.
Note If the alarm has been triggered by the volumetric sensor, this will be indi-
cated by a flashing of the indicator on the driver's door. This flashing will be
different to that for an activated alarm.
Unlocking and locking106
r and lift the tailgate fig. 66. The tail-
of the two handles on the interior lining
ht movement.
erate depending on the situation of the vehicle.
cannot be opened, however if it is unlocked
erative and the boot may be opened.
tus, press the button or the button on
ument panel if the tailgate is open or not prop-
ng is also given if the tailgate is open when the
h*.
Fig. 67 Detail of the inside of the tailgate: hand grip
A1
altea_EN Seite 106 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Tailgate
Unlocking and locking
The operation of the tailgate opening system is electric. It is
activated by using the handle on the tailgate
Opening the tailgate
Pull on the release leve
gate will then open.
Closing the tailgate
Grip the tailgate by one
and close it, using a lig
The system may or may not op
If the tailgate is locked then it
then the opening system is op
To the locking / unlocking sta
the remote control key.
A warning appears in the instr
erly closed.* An audible warni
car is driven faster than 6 km/
Fig. 66 Tailgate: opening from the outside
Unlocking and locking 107
Safety Fir Technical Data
to be opened if the central locking
xample, if the battery is flat)
oot allowing access to the emergency
inside the luggage compartment
groove and unlock the locking system,
ght to left, as shown by the arrow
Fig. 68 Tailgate: emer- gency open
altea_EN Seite 107 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
Always close the tailgate properly. Risk of accident or injury.
Do not close the tailgate by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
Ensure the tailgate is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unex- pectedly while driving.
Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and lock both the tailgate and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle.
Closing the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the tailgate.
Never drive with the tailgate open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
If you only open the tailgate, do not leave the key inside. The vehicle will not be opened if the key is left inside.
Emergency opening
This allows the vehicle
does not operate (for e
There is a groove in the b
opening mechanism.
Opening the tailgate from
Insert the key bit in the
turning the key from ri
fig. 68.
Unlocking and locking108
t left door
t right door
ting the electric window buttons in the rear
left door
right door
's door can be used to disable the electric
ors.
ttons on rear doors are activated.
s on rear doors are deactivated.
ric windows can result in injury.
ithout observing and ensuring it is clear, to do s injury to you and third parties. Make sure window.
ey with you when you leave the vehicle.
sabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if An uncontrolled use of the key could start the ic equipment(e.g. electric windows), causing n be locked using the remote control key. This lt in an emergency.
work until the key has been removed from the doors has been opened.
ty switch to disable the rear electric windows. en disabled.
altea_EN Seite 108 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Windows
Opening or closing the windows electrically
The front and rear electric windows can be operated by using
the controls on the driver's door.
Opening and closing the windows
Press the button to open a window.
Pull button to close a window .
Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended
.
You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off
the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door has been
opened and the key has not been removed from the ignition.
Buttons on the driver's door
Button for window in fron
Button for window in fron
Buttons for rear windows*
Safety switch for deactiva
doors
Button for window in rear
Button for window in rear
Safety switch *
Safety switch on the driver
window buttons in the rear do
Safety switch not pressed: bu
Safety switch pressed: button
WARNING
Incorrect use of the elect
Never close the tailgate w otherwise could cause seriou that no one is in the path of a
Always take the vehicle k
Never leave children or di they have access to the keys. engine or activate any electr risk of accident. The doors ca could make assistance difficu
The electric windows will ignition and one of the front
If necessary, use the safe Make sure that they have be
Fig. 69 Detail of driver door: controls for the front and rear windows
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A3
Unlocking and locking 109
Safety Fir Technical Data
ork when the ignition has been switched off,
on.
e function will not work if the battery has been
if the battery is flat. The function then has to be
oll-back function will not work if there is a
ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
ll-back function. This reduces the risk
dows are closing.
when closing automatically, the window stops
ediately .
mediately (within 10 seconds) why the window
tempting to close it again. After 10 seconds the
sumes.
ucted, the window will stop at this point.
on why the window cannot be closed, try to
nds.
seconds, the window will open fully when you
ne-touch closing is reactivated.
oll-back function will not work if there is a
ndows. Contact an Authorised Service Centre.
tric windows can result in injury.
altea_EN Seite 109 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruc-
tion, the window will automatically open again page 109. If this happens,
check why the window could not be closed before attempting to close it
again.
One-touch opening and closing
One-touch opening and closing means you do not have to
hold down the button.
One-touch closing
Pull up the window button briefly up to the second position. The
window closes fully.
One-touch opening
Push down the window button briefly up to the second position.
The window opens fully.
Restoring one-touch opening and closing
Close all windows.
Use the key to lock the vehicle from outside and hold the key in
the lock position for at least one second. The one-touch function
is now ready for operation.
The buttons page 108, fig. 69 and have two levels for opening the
window and two for closing it. This makes it easier to open and close windows
to the desired position.
One-touch closing does not w
even if the key is in the igniti
The automatic open and clos
temporarily disconnected, or
reactivated.
The one-touch function and r
malfunction in the electric wi
Roll-back function
The windows have a ro
of injuries when the win
If a window is obstructed
at this point and lowers imm
If this happens, check im
could not be closed before at
normal automatic function re
If the window is still obstr
If there is no obvious reas
close it again within five seco
If you wait longer than 5 - 10
operate one of the buttons. O
The one-touch function and r
malfunction in the electric wi
WARNING
Incorrect use of the elec
A1 A2
Unlocking and locking110
button on the remote control for about 3
hich function electrically will be either
ton to interrupt the function.
ompletely closed, the indicators will
f*
e sliding/tilting roof
of is opened and closed using the
ignition is switched on.
Fig. 70 Roof lining description: rotary sun roof control / deflector
altea_EN Seite 110 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. Please ensure that children are never left alone inside the vehicle.
The electric windows will work until the key has been removed from the ignition and one of the front doors has been opened.
Never close the tailgate without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a window.
Never allow people to remain in the vehicle when you close the vehicle from the outside. The windows cannot be opened even in an emergency.
Note The roll-back function is deactivated if the windows are closed from the
outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing
page 110.
Convenience opening and closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the
locking or the unlocking position until all windows are either
opened or closed.
Release the key to interrupt this function.
Using the remote control
Push the lock or unlock
seconds. All windows w
opened or closed.
Release the unlock but
Once the windows are c
flash.
Sliding/tilting roo
Opening and closing th
The sliding/tilting sunro
rotary button when the
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking 111
Safety Fir Technical Data
isabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if s. Unsupervised use of a key could mean that electrical equipment is used (e.g. electric of accident! The doors can be locked using the ld make assistance difficult in an emergency.
of continues to function until one of the front removed from the ignition.
or lock of the driver's door in the locking
ng/tilting sunroof is closed.
rrupt this function.
n the remote control for about 3 seconds.
roof is closed.
tton to interrupt the function.
g sunroof has closed completely, the indi-
tary button remains in the last position selected
venience closing from outside the vehicle and
the next time you drive.
altea_EN Seite 111 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Closing the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position fig. 70 .
Opening/tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position . The sunroof opens to the
convenience position where wind noise is reduced.
To open the roof further, turn the switch to position and hold
the switch in this position until the roof opens to the desired
position.
Tilting the sliding/tilting sunroof
Turn the rotary button to position .
Always close the sliding/tilting roof fully if you park the vehicle or leave it
unattended .
The sliding/tilting sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after
the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front
passenger door are not opened.
Sunroof blind
The sunroof blind is opened together with the sliding/tilting roof. If required,
it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the sliding/tilting sunroof can result in injury.
Never close the sliding/tilting sunroof without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and others. Make sure that no one is in the path of the sliding/tilting sunroof.
Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
Never leave children or d they have access to the key the engine is started or that sliding/tilting sunroof). Risk remote control key. This cou
The sliding/tilting sunro doors is opened and the key
Convenience closing*
Using the door lock
Hold the key in the do
position until the slidi
Release the key to inte
Using the remote control
Push the lock button o
The sliding/tilting sun
Release the unlock bu
When the sliding/tiltin
cators flash once.
Note The sliding/tilting sunroof ro
if the roof is closed using con
will have to be re-positioned
AA
AB
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Unlocking and locking112
d against the roof opening. The sliding/tilting
n immediately if it is obstructed when closing.
een opened again by the roll-back function, it
g the rotary button at the front in position
ing roof has closed fully. Please note that the t the roll-back function.
eakdown
nroof can be closed manually.
y inserting a screwdriver in the rear section.
cover fastening, insert it in the opening as far
the spring) and close the sliding roof.
tion.
AA
altea_EN Seite 112 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Roll-back function of the sliding/tilting roof*
The sliding/tilting roof has a roll-back function which prevents larger objects
getting trapped when the roof is closed. The roll-back function does not
prevent fingers getting pinche
sunroof stops and opens agai
If the sliding/tilting roof has b
can be closed only by pressin
fig. 71 until the sliding/tilt
sunroof will now close withou
Operation in the event of a br
In case of a breakdown, the su
Remove the plastic cover b
Remove the lever from the
as possible (pushing against
Fit the lever back into posiFig. 71 Roof lining description: rotary sun roof control / deflector
Fig. 72 Emergency closing handle
Lights and visibility 113
Safety Fir Technical Data
ts*
osition or to the first stop. The
switch lights up.
lights (vehicles with front fog lights)
osition or to the second stop
lights up in the control panel.
lights (vehicles with no front fog lights)
m position to the last stop. A warning
strument panel.
e lights on. Risk of accident. The side lights are ate the road ahead and to ensure that other u. Always use your dipped headlights if it is
hts will only work with the ignition on. The side
when the ignition is turned off.
r the key has been taken out of the ignition lock,
driver door remains open. This is a reminder to
ght that it can dazzle drivers behind you. You
only when visibility is very poor.
altea_EN Seite 113 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Lights and visibility
Lights
Switching lights on and off
Switching on the side lights
Turn the light switch fig. 73 to position .
Switching on dipped headlights
Turn the light switch to position .
Switching off the lights
Turn the light switch to position 0.
Switching on the fog ligh
Pull the switch out of p
symbol in the light
Switching on the rear fog
Pull the switch out of p
. A warning lamp
Switching on the rear fog
Pull the light switch fro
lamp lights up in the in
WARNING
Never drive with just the sid not bright enough to illumin road users are able to see yo dark or if visibility is poor.
Note The dipped beam headlig
lights come on automatically
If the lights are left on afte
a buzzer will sound while the
switch the lights off.
The rear fog light is so bri
should use the rear fog light
Fig. 73 Detailed view of dash panel: lights, fog light and rear fog light control
Lights and visibility114
0.
is switched on, dipped headlights are automat-
ensitive sensor if you drive into a tunnel, for
es on the dipped headlights when the vehicle
a few seconds and it switches the lights off
ess than 65 km/h for a few minutes.
e dipped headlights when the windscreen
ontinuously for a few seconds and it switches
uous or intermittent wipe is switched off for
ght control is connected but the dipped lights
lights up on the light control fig. 74. If the
the dipped lights, the instrument and control
trol is switched on, the headlights will not be ain. Therefore, the dipped beam must be
automatic headlight system, when the key is
acoustic signal will only sound if the light
r if the vehicle is not fitted with the coming
altea_EN Seite 114 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
If you are towing a trailer equipped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with
a factory-fitted towing bracket, the rear fog light on the car will automatically
be switched off.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Depending on weather conditions (very cold or wet), the front and rear
lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has no influence on
the life expectancy of the lighting system. The lights will soon demist when
they are switched on.
Automatic lighting*
Activation
Rotate the switch to the position Auto, this indication will light
up.
Deactivation
Turn the light switch to
Automatic lighting
If automatic headlight control
ically switched on by a light-s
example.
The motorway function switch
is driven at over 140 km/h for
when the vehicle is driven at l
The rain sensor switches on th
wipers have been operating c
the lights off when the contin
some minutes page 127.
When the automatic dipped li
are off, the warning lamp automatic control switches on
lighting is also switched on.
WARNING
If automatic headlight con switched on in fog or heavy r switched on manually.
Note For those vehicles with the
removed from the ignition, the
control is in the position o
home function.
Fig. 74 Automatic lighting
Lights and visibility 115
Safety Fir Technical Data
ps)
ad safety in vehicles fitted with bi-xenon lamps.
tely to the headlights and are switched on each
if the light setting is in position 0 or .
ed light in combination with the daytime s)
the daytime lighting are activated at the same
he instrument panel lighting will automatically
entering a tunnel) and the daytime lights will go
ed light control switches off the dipped lights
nel), the daytime lights come back on.
*
f, move the indicator and main beam lever
cator and headlamp flash) and hold in this posi-
conds while holding this position. The daytime
e switched on.
hts
f, move the indicator and main beam lever
tor and headlamp flash) and hold in this posi-
conds while holding this position. The daytime
n not be switched on.
bi-xenon lamps)
f, move the indicator and main beam lever
tor and headlamp flash).
econds. The daytime lights are deactivated and
altea_EN Seite 115 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If the daylight driving automatic light function is switched on, the fog
lights or rear fog light cannot be switched on in addition.
The use of the lighting described here is subject to the relevant statutory
requirements.
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
cause disruptions or faults in the automatic lighting system.
To avoid damage to the tail lights, the lights mounted on the tailgate go
off when the tailgate is opened (according to country).
Daytime lights*
The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing
the visibility of the vehicle. The daytime running lights are
enabled automatically when the ignition is switched on. It is
automatically switched off when the side lights are turned on.
Daytime lights (halogen lamps)19)
The daytime lights increase road safety in vehicles fitted with halogen lamps.
These include the dipped, side and registration plate lights.
The daytime lights are switched on each time the ignition is turned on if the
light setting is in position 0 or . Depending upon the model, a control
lamp on the light control switch or the lighting up of the instrument panel
will indicate that the daytime lighting is on.
It is not possible for the driver to switch the daytime lights on or off. Please
contact a qualified workshop if you wish to deactivate the lights.
Daytime lights (bi-xenon lam
The daytime lights increase ro
The lights are built-in separa
time the ignition is turned on
Automatic control of the dipp lighting (bi-xenon headlamp
If the dipped light control and
time, the dipped lights and t
come on as required (e.g. on
off. When the automatic dipp
(e.g. on coming out of the tun
Activating the daytime lights
With the ignition switched of
upwards and back (right indi
tion.
Switch on the ignition for 3 se
lights are activated and can b
Deactivating the daytime lig
With the ignition switched of
upwards and back (left indica
tion.
Switch on the ignition for 3 se
lights are deactivated and ca
Deactivating daytime lights (
With the ignition switched of
upwards and back (left indica
Switch on the ignition for 3 s
can not be switched on.
19) It is only available in some countries or as an optional extra
Lights and visibility116
connected, any doors or the tailgate remain
to position .
n.
activated when the vehicle is unlocked if:
ion and
darkness.
itches off in the following cases:
elay in switching off the headlamps has ended
in.
to position .
n.
itching off the headlamps in the Coming Home
n be changed or the function can be connected
ights and visibility page 76.
ed while the lights are on, and the lights are
s door opened, no acoustic signal is heard, as
ion is on, the lights are automatically switched
pt when the light switch is in position or
altea_EN Seite 116 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Activating daytime lights (bi-xenon lamps)
With the ignition switched off, move the indicator and main beam lever
upwards and back (left indicator and headlamp flash).
Switch on the ignition for 3 seconds. The daytime lights are activated and can
be switched on.
Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your
country.
Coming home / leaving home function*
The Coming Home function is controlled manually. The
Leaving Home function is controlled with a photo sensor.
If the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is connected, the front side
and dipped lights, the tail lights and the registration plate light will light up
to provide assistance.
Coming home function
The Coming Home function is activated by switching off the ignition and
briefly flashing the lights. When the driver's door is opened, the Coming
Home lighting comes on. If the driver's door is already open when the lights
are flashed briefly, the Coming Home lighting comes on immediately.
When the last door of the vehicle or the tailgate is closed, the Coming Home
function starts and the switching off the headlights is delayed.
The Coming Home lighting switches off in the following cases:
On completion of the time period established for the delay in switching off
the lights after all the vehicle doors and the tailgate have been closed.
If, 30 seconds after being
open.
If the light switch is turned
If the ignition is switched o
Leaving home function
The Leaving Home function is
the light control is in posit
the photo sensor detects
The Leaving Home lighting sw
If the time period for the d
If the vehicle is locked aga
If the light switch is turned
If the ignition is switched o
Note The setting for the delay in sw
and Leaving Home function ca
or disconnected in the menu L
If the ignition key is remov
flashed briefly and the driver'
when the Coming Home funct
off after a period of time (exce
.
Lights and visibility 117
Safety Fir Technical Data
coming traffic more than necessary. At the same
dlight settings, the driver has the best possible
djusted when the dipped beam is switched on.
humb wheel down from the basic setting 0.
trol
amps (xenon lamps) are equipped with
trol. This means that the headlights will be
of the vehicle and nodding movements when
tomatically compensated for.
amps do not have headlight range control.
for driving through bends)
ends, the headlights will light the
f the road.
A2
Fig. 76 Cornering lighting using self-direc- tional headlights
altea_EN Seite 117 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Instrument and switch lighting / Headlight range control
Instrument and switch lighting
When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and
switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the
thumb wheel fig. 75 .
The instrument lighting (dials and needles), the centre console illumination
and the illumination of the displays are regulated by a light sensor incorpo-
rated in the instrument cluster.
The instrument lighting (dials and needles) is switched on when the ignition
is on and the vehicle lights are off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-
matically as the daylight starts to fade. It goes out completely when the
ambient light level is very low. This function is intended to remind the driver
to switch on the dipped-beam headlights in good time when light conditions
become poor.
Headlight range control
By using the electrical headlight range control, you can adjust the head-
light range to the load level that is being carried in the vehicle. This way, it is
possible to avoid dazzling on
time, by using the correct hea
lighting for the road ahead.
The headlights can only be a
To lower the beam, turn the t
Dynamic headlight range con
Vehicles with gas discharge l dynamic headlight range con adjusted to suit the load level
pulling off and braking are au
Vehicles with gas discharge l
Adaptive headlights* (
When driving around b
most important areas o
Fig. 75 Dash panel: regu- lation for instrument and switch illumination and headlight range control
A1
A1
A2
A2
Lights and visibility118
t control is switched on, the dipped head- in fog. They should be switched on manually
river is personally responsible for the correct . Automatic headlight control is merely a Where necessary, switch on the lights manu-
ts are used to draw the attention of
vehicle in emergencies.
n:
afe distance from moving traffic.
Fig. 77 Dash panel: switch for hazard warning lights
altea_EN Seite 118 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Dynamic curve lights* (AFS)
The dynamic curve lights only operate if the vehicle is travelling at more than
10 km/h and the dipped headlamps are on. When taking a bend, the road is
illuminated better with directional gas discharge lamps than with conven-
tional fixed headlamps.
A fault in the system is indicated via the flashing of the control lamp on the
instrument panel. At the same time, a text message with information or
instructions to perform necessary operations may appear on the instrument
panel display. Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the fault
repaired.
If the control lamp lights up on the instrument panel but all the lamps are
operating correctly page 266, there may still be a fault in the dynamic
curve lighting system (AFS). Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and
have the fault repaired.
WARNING
If the automatic dipped light control is switched on, the dipped head- lights will not be switched on in fog. They should be switched on manually using the light switch. The driver is personally responsible for the correct use of lights in all situations. Automatic headlight control is merely a system to support the driver. Where necessary, switch on the lights manu- ally using the light switch.
Fog lights with cornering function*
When the indicator is switched on to turn or on very tight bends, the right or
left fog lamp automatically comes on to function as a cornering light. The
cornering light only operates if the dipped lights are on.
WARNING
If the automatic dipped ligh lights will not be switched on using the light switch. The d use of lights in all situations system to support the driver. ally using the light switch.
Hazard warning lights
The hazard warning ligh
other road users to your
If your vehicle breaks dow
1. Park your vehicle at a s
Lights and visibility 119
Safety Fir Technical Data
creases if your vehicle breaks down. Always ts and a warning triangle to draw the attention tationary vehicle.
talytic converter could come into contact with r the vehicle, for example dry grass or spilt !
if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long
itched off.
ning lights described here is subject to the rele-
altea_EN Seite 119 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
2. Press the button to switch on the hazard warning lights .
3. Switch the engine off.
4. Apply the handbrake.
5. On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear, and for an automatic
move the selector lever to P.
6. Use the warning triangle to draw the attention of other road users
to your vehicle.
7. Always take the vehicle key with you when you leave the vehicle.
You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, for
instance when:
reaching the tail end of a traffic jam,
there is an emergency
your vehicle breaks down due to a technical fault,
you are towing another vehicle or your vehicle is being towed.
All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are
switched on. That is that the two turn signal indicator lamps and the
indicator lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The hazard
warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.
Emergency braking function
When the vehicle detects sudden braking, the hazard warning lights auto-
matically come on to warn vehicles behind. The hazard warning lights go off
when the vehicle accelerates or the hazard warning light switch is pressed.
WARNING
The risk of an accident in use the hazard warning ligh of other road users to your s
Never park where the ca inflammable materials unde petrol. This could start a fire
Note The battery will run down
time, even if the ignition is sw
The use of the hazard war
vant statutory requirements.
Lights and visibility120
nd off
position .
fig. 78 to switch on the main
rds you to switch the main beam head-
he steering wheel to operate the
ts
nd remove the key from the lock.
wn to turn the right or left-hand parking
her drivers. Risk of accident! Never use the headlight flasher if they could dazzle other
when the ignition is switched on. The corre-
flashes in the dash panel. The warning lamp
als are operated, provided a trailer is correctly
e vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defective, the
le speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs are
oes not light up. Change the bulb.
A3
A4
altea_EN Seite 120 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Indicator and main beam headlight lever
The turn signal and main beam lever also operates the
parking lights and the headlight flasher.
The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following
functions:
Switching on the turn signals
Move the lever all the way up fig. 78 to indicate right, and
all the way down to indicate left.
Signalling a lane change
Push the lever up or down to the point where you incur
resistance and then release it. The turn signal will flash several
times. The corresponding warning lamp will also flash.
Switching main beam on a
Turn the light switch to
Press the lever forward
beams.
Pull the lever back towa
lights off again.
Headlight flashers
Pull the lever towards t
flasher.
Switching on parking ligh
Switch the ignition off a
Move the lever up or do
lights on, respectively.
WARNING
The main beam can dazzle ot main beam headlights or the drivers.
Note The turn signals only work
sponding warning lamp or flashes when the turn sign
attached and connected to th
warning lamp flashes at doub
damaged, warning lamp d
Fig. 78 Indicator and main beam lever
A1
A2
A1 A2
Lights and visibility 121
Safety Fir Technical Data
e 1
ed to select the following positions:
(not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
rox. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-
en the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
n .
fig. 79.
Fig. 79 Interior roof trim: front interior lights
altea_EN Seite 121 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam
headlights are already on. The warning lamp then lights up on the dash
panel.
The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever even if
no other lights are switched on. The warning lamp then lights up on the
dash panel.
When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the rear light
on the corresponding side of the vehicle light up. The parking lights will only
work if the key is removed from the ignition. If the lights are switched on, a
buzzer gives an audible warning while the driver door is open.
If the turn signal lever is left on after the key has been taken out of the
ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver door is opened. This
is a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless of course you wish to leave
the parking light on.
Interior lights
Interior front light, typ
The switch fig. 79 is us
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position
ically switched on when the v
ignition lock And turn off app
rior lights are switched off wh
switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the positio
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to position O
AA
Lights and visibility122
n .
fig. 80.
closed, the interior lights will be switched off
iding the key has been removed and the cour-
his prevents the battery from discharging.
altea_EN Seite 122 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Interior front light, type 2
The switch fig. 80 is used to select the following positions:
Courtesy light position
Rocker switch in flat position (not activated). The interior lights are automat-
ically switched on when the vehicle is unlocked or the key removed from the
ignition lock And turn off approx. 20 seconds after closing the doors. The inte-
rior lights are switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
switched on.
Interior light switched on
Push the switch to the positio
Interior light switched off O
Push the switch to position O
Note If not all the vehicle doors are
after approx. 10 minutes, prov
tesy light position selected. T
Fig. 80 Interior roof trim: front interior lights
AA
Lights and visibility 123
Safety Fir Technical Data
off
on to switch the reading light off.
ng lights*
ed to select the following positions:
, the interior and reading lights are switched
t
(left reading light) or to position (right
. The interior lights are automatically switched
ed or the key removed from the ignition lock The
Fig. 83 Interior roof trim: rear interior lights and reading lights.
1
A4
altea_EN Seite 123 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Front reading lights
Switching on the reading light
Press the corresponding button fig. 81 and fig. 82 to switch on
the reading light.
Switching the reading lights
Press the corresponding butt
Rear interior and readi
The switch fig. 83 is us
Interior light switched off 0
In switch position fig. 83
off.
Switching on the reading ligh
Turn the switch to position
reading light).
Courtesy light position
Turn the control to position
on when the vehicle is unlock
Fig. 81 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 1
Fig. 82 Interior roof trim: front reading lights, type 2
AB AB
AC
A
A2
A3
Lights and visibility124
d the front passenger can be pulled out of their
vehicle and turned towards the doors fig. 84
n visors have covers. When you open the cover
p.
ll go out when the vanity mirror cover is pushed
d back up.
ut 10 minutes following the removal of the igni-
tery from discharging.
altea_EN Seite 124 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
light turns off about 20 seconds after closing the doors. The interior lights are
switched off when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.
Interior lights or both reading lights switched on
Turn the control to position .
Note If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the interior lights will be switched off
after approx. 10 minutes, providing the key has been removed and the cour-
tesy light position selected. This prevents the battery from discharging.
Visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors for the driver an
mountings in the centre of the
The make-up mirrors in the su
, a lamp in the roof lights u
The lamp* in the roof lining wi
back or the sun visor is pushe
Note The roof lamp will turn off abo
tion key. This prevents the bat
A5
Fig. 84 Sun visor on the driver side
A1
A2
Lights and visibility 125
Safety Fir Technical Data
the left or right to set the length of the
e left: long intervals; control to the right:
per interval stages can be set using switch
osition .
osition .
position to give the windscreen a brief
art to move faster if you keep the lever
er than 2 seconds.
system
he steering wheel - Position . The wash
ediately and the wipers will start with a
and wiper systems will function at the
f over 120 km/h.
ipers will keep running for approximately
in the wiper blade* area (page
ome versions, there is the possibility of heating
the windscreen wiper blades in order to aid de-
n is switched on by pressing the rear heating
A2
A3
A4
A5
altea_EN Seite 125 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Windscreen washers
Front windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers
and the automatic wash and wipe.
The windscreen wiper lever fig. 85 has the following positions:
Switching off the wipers
Move the lever to position .
Intermittent wipe
Move the lever up to position .
Move the control to
intervals. Control to th
short intervals. Four wi
.
Slow wipe
Move the lever up to p
Continuous wipe
Move the lever up to p
Brief wipe
Move the lever down to
wipe. The wiper will st
pressed down for long
Wash and wipe automatic
Pull the lever towards t
function will start imm
slight delay. The wash
same time at speeds o
Release the lever. The w
four seconds.
Optional heated windscreen
In some countries and with s
the windscreen in the area of
icing in the zone. The functio
window key .
Fig. 85 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever
A0
A1
AA
AA
Lights and visibility126
e function is on, the intervals are directly
s way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter
way any obstacles that are on the windscreen.
he obstacle blocks its path. Remove the
back on again.
ts that may be trapped in the side areas of the
wiper arms to the service position (horizontal).
ted jets is controlled automatically when the
ding upon the outside temperature.
altea_EN Seite 126 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
WARNING
Worn and dirty wiper blades obstruct visibility and reduce safety levels.
In cold conditions, you should not use the wash / wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.
Always note the corresponding warnings on page 236.
Caution In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass before using the wipers for the first time. If you switch on the wipers
when the wiper blades are frozen to the windscreen, you could damage both
the wiper blades and the wiper motor.
Note The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on.
In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, the windscreen wiper will only
work when the ignition is on and the bonnet closed.
When in use, the wipers do not go as far as the rest position. When the
lever is moved to position 0, they are totally hidden.
The next speed down will automatically be selected if wiper speed
page 125, fig. 85 or is selected when the vehicle stops. The set speed
will be resumed when the vehicle starts again
The windscreen will be wiped again after approximately five seconds once
the automatic wipe/wash system has been operated, provided the vehicle
is in transit (drip function). If you activate the wipers less than three seconds
after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without the last wipe.
For the drip function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and
then on again.
When the intermittent wip
proportional to the speed. Thi
the intervals.
The wiper will try to wipe a
The wiper will stop moving if t
obstacle and switch the wiper
Before removing any objec
windscreen, always move the
The heat output of the hea
ignition is switched on, depen
A2
A3
Lights and visibility 127
Safety Fir Technical Data
sor
iper lever into position fig. 87.
the left or right to set the sensitivity of the
the right: highly sensitive. Control to the
interval wipe function. You will have to switch
switch off the ignition. This is done by switching
n off and back on.
windscreen in front of the sensor. This may
ults.
A1
altea_EN Seite 127 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen
wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain.
Switching on the rain sen
Move the windscreen w
Move the control to
rain sensor. Control to
left: less sensitive.
The rain sensor is part of the
the rain sensor back on if you
the wiper intermittent functio
Note Do not put stickers on the
cause sensor disruption or fa
Fig. 86 Rain sensor*
Fig. 87 Windscreen wiper lever
AA
Lights and visibility128
en wiper and washer system
ards to position fig. 88. The wash
diately and the wiper will start with a
reen wash system will function as long as
is position.
iper then wipes for approximately 4
tervals again.
asher system stops and the wipers func-
e will obstruct visibility and reduce safety.
nding warnings on page 236.
k that the wiper blade is not frozen to the glass
first time. If you switch on the wiper when the
ass, this could damage both the wiper blade
only function when the ignition is switched on
indscreen wipers switched on, the rear wind-
pe.
A7
altea_EN Seite 128 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Rear window wiper
The windscreen wiper lever operates the windscreen wiper
and the wash and wipe system for the rear window.
Switching on the interval wipe
Press the lever forwards to position fig. 88. The wiper will
wipe the window approximately every 6 seconds.
Switching off the interval wipe function
Pull the lever back from position towards the steering wheel.
The wiper will continue to function for a short period if you switch
off whilst the wipers are in motion.
Switching on the windscre
Press the lever fully forw
function will start imme
slight delay. The windsc
you hold the lever in th
Release the lever. The w
seconds, and then in in
Release the lever. The w
tion.
WARNING
A worn or dirty wiper blad
Always note the correspo
Caution In icy conditions, always chec
before using the wiper for the
wiper blade is frozen to the gl
and the wiper motor.
Note The windscreen wiper will
and the tailgate is closed.
In reverse gear, with the w
screen wiper will make one wi
Fig. 88 Windscreen wiper and windscreen wash lever: rear window wiper
A6
A6
Lights and visibility 129
Safety Fir Technical Data
interior mirror*
zle function can be switched on and off
function
. 89. Warning lamp goes out:
function
. 89. Warning lamp is lit.
tivated every time the ignition is switched on.
ts up in the mirror housing.
is activated the interior mirror will darken auto- ount of light it receives (for example from the
d). The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if
Fig. 89 Automatic anti- dazzle interior mirror.
AB
altea_EN Seite 129 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Headlight washer system
The headlight washers clean the headlight lenses.
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen
washer is used and the windscreen wiper lever is pulled towards the steering
wheel for at least 1.5 seconds provided the dipped headlights or main
beams are switched on. Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the head-
lights at regular intervals, for instance when filling the fuel tank.
Note To ensure that the headlight washers work properly in winter, keep the
nozzle holders in the bumper free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer
spray.
To remove water, the windscreen wipers will be activated from time to
time, the headlight wipers will be activated every three cycles.
Mirrors
Interior mirror
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see clearly through the
rear window.
Manual anti-dazzle function for interior mirror
In the basic mirror position, the lever at the bottom edge of the mirror should
be at the front. Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function.
Automatic anti-dazzle
The automatic anti-daz
as desired.
Switching off anti-dazzle
Press button fig
Switching on anti-dazzle
Press button fig
Anti-dazzle function
The anti-dazzle function is ac
The green indicator lamp ligh
When the anti-dazzle function
matically according to the am
headlights of a vehicle behin
reverse gear is engaged.
AA
AA
Lights and visibility130
position the mirror so that you have a
f the vehicle.
(right exterior mirror).
to position the mirror so that you have a
f the car .
rs*
to the central position fig. 90 so
w mirrors warm up and the heated wind-
de rest area is activated page 125.
is not activated in temperatures above
*
90 to position to fold in the exterior
ays fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
matic car wash. This will help prevent
ith convenience control*
ror will fold back automatically with
ith the remote or the key)
the door and use the contact
ck out to the extended position*
r position to fold the exterior mirrors back
A1
altea_EN Seite 130 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Note The automatic anti-dazzle function will only work properly if the sun
blind* for the rear window is retracted and there are no other objects
preventing light from reaching the interior mirror.
If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in
front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from
working well or even from working at all.
Exterior mirrors
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the rotary knob in
the centre console.
Basic setting of exterior mirrors
1. Turn knob fig. 90 to position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to
good view to the rear o
3. Turn knob to position R
4. Swivel the rotary knob
good view to the rear o
Heating the exterior mirro
Turn the knob forwards
that the heated rear vie
screen* in the wiper bla
The wing mirror heating
approximately 20C.
Folding in exterior mirrors
Turn the control fig.
mirrors. You should alw
driving through an auto
damage.
Folding rear view mirrors w
The outer rear view mir
convenience closing (w
To unfold it again, open
Folding exterior mirrors ba
Turn the knob to anothe
out .
Fig. 90 Controls of exte- rior mirrors
Lights and visibility 131
Safety Fir Technical Data
be adjusted separately or simultaneously, as
unction does not activate with speeds higher
altea_EN Seite 131 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Synchronised mirror adjustment
1. Turn the control to the position L (left exterior mirror).
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the mirror so that you have a
good view to the rear of the vehicle. The right exterior mirror will
be adjusted at the same time (synchronised).
WARNING
The rear view convex or aspheric mirror increase the field of vision however the objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when changing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
If possible, use the interior mirror to estimate distances to vehicles behind you.
Make sure that you do not get your finger trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of injury!
For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer
needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.
Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be
adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
In vehicles with electric wing mirrors, the following points should be
observed: if, due to an external force (e.g. a knock while manoeuvring), the
adjustment of the mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have to be
completely folded electrically. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster function.
The rear view mirrors can
described before.
The wing mirrors folding f
than 40 km/h.
Seats and stowage132
the foot well when the vehicle is moving; panel, out of the window or on the seat. This . An incorrect sitting position exposes you to
case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect
er and front passenger to keep a distance of ng wheel or dash panel. Failure to respect the t the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal
the driver and the steering wheel or between dash panel should always be as great as
passenger seat only when the vehicle is to the forwards/backwards adjustment of the at could move unexpectedly while the vehicle
e the risk of an accident and therefore, injury. our seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting ts.
to installing a child seat on the front ling a child seat, observe the warning note in .
altea_EN Seite 132 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Seats and stowage
The importance of correct seat adjustment
Proper seat adjustment optimises the level of protection
offered by seat belts and airbags.
Your vehicle has five passenger seats, two individual front seats and three
places on the rear seat.. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.
The driver seat and the front passenger seat can be adjusted in many ways to
suit the physical requirements of the vehicle occupants. The correct seat
position is very important for:
a fast and easy operation of all controls on the instrument panel,
a relaxed posture which does not cause drowsiness,
safe driving page 7,
ensuring that the seat belts and airbag system provide maximum protec-
tion page 19.
WARNING
If the driver and passengers assume improper sitting positions, they may sustain critical injuries.
More people than available seats must never be transported in your vehicle.
Every passenger in the vehicle must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system page 46, Child safety.
The front seats and all head restraints must always be adjusted to body size and the seat belt must always be properly adjusted to provide you and your passengers with optimum protection.
Always keep your feet on never rest them on the dash is also applied to passengers an increased risk of injury in airbag is triggered, you could sitting position.
It is important for the driv at least 25 cm from the steeri minimum distance means tha injury. The distance between the front passenger and the possible.
Adjust the driver or front stationary. This also applies rear seats. Otherwise, your se is moving. This could increas In addition, while adjusting y position. Risk of fatal acciden
Special guidelines apply passenger seat. When instal the page 46, Child safety
WARNING (continued)
Seats and stowage 133
Safety Fir Technical Data
int so that its upper edge is at the same
head, or as close as possible to the same
r head and, at minimum, at eye level
2.
page 134
restraints removed or improperly adjusted injuries.
d restraints could lead to death in the event of
d restraints also increase the risk of injury d driving or braking manoeuvres.
t always be adjusted according to the
Fig. 92 Side view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted
altea_EN Seite 133 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Head restraints
Correct adjustment of head restraints
Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of
passengers protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in
most accident situations.
Adjust the head restra
level as the top of your
level as the top of you
fig. 91 and fig. 9
Adjusting the head restraints
WARNING
Travelling with the head increases the risk of severe
Improperly adjusted hea a collision or accident.
Incorrectly adjusted hea during sudden or unexpecte
The head restraints mus passenger's height.
Fig. 91 Front view: head restraints and seat belts correctly adjusted
Seats and stowage134
int, press the button and push head
d restraint engages securely in one of its
ats)
t forward or back to the required position.
int
up as far as it will go.
93 (arrow).
f fitting without releasing the button.
t into the guides on the rear backrest.
n.
nt to suit body size page 14 and
straints have been removed. Risk of injury.
traints are in an unsuitable position, there is
straint, you must always adjust it properly for tection.
warnings page 133, Correct adjustment
altea_EN Seite 134 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Removing or adjusting head restraints
The head restraints can be adjusted by moving them up and
down.
Adjusting height (front seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head restraint, press the button and push head
restraint downwards.
Make sure that it engages securely into position.
Adjusting height (rear seats)
Press the button on the side and pull upwards to the desired
position.
To lower the head restra
restraint downwards.
Make sure that the hea
positions page 14.
Angle adjustment (front se
Press the head restrain
Removing the head restra
Push the head restraint
Press the button fig.
Pull head restraint out o
Fitting the head restraint
Insert the head restrain
Push head restraint dow
Adjust the head restrai
page 13.
WARNING
Never drive if the head re
Never drive if the head res a risk of serious injury.
After refitting the head re height to achieve optimal pro
Please observe the safety of head restraints.
Fig. 93 Adjusting and removing the head restraints
Seats and stowage 135
Safety Fir Technical Data
t angle
e backrest and turn the hand wheel.
support*
e backrest and turn the hand wheel to
port.
cushioned area is determined by the settings
his supports the natural curvature of the spine
r front passenger seat while the vehicle is in r seat, you will assume an incorrect sitting nts. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat tionary.
ry to the driver and front passenger in case of dent, never drive with the backrest tilted um protection of the seat belt can be achieved in an upright position and the driver and front justed their seat belts. The further the back- e greater the risk of injury due to improper
curing the seat height into forwards/back- be caused if the backrest is tilted without due
altea_EN Seite 135 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Front seats
Adjustment of the front seats
The control elements in fig. 94 are mirrored for the front right-
hand seat.
Adjusting the seat forwards and backwards
Pull up the grip and move the seat forwards or backwards.
Then release the grip and move the seat further until the
catch engages.
Adjusting the seat height*
Pull the lever up or push down (several times if necessary) from
its home position. This adjusts the seat height in stages.
Adjusting the backres
Take your weight off th
Adjusting the lumbar
Take your weight off th
adjust the lumbar sup
The backrest curvature of the
made in the lumbar region. T
very effectively.
WARNING
Never adjust the driver o motion. While adjusting you position. Risk of fatal accide only when the vehicle is sta
To reduce the risk of inju a sudden braking or an acci towards the rear. The maxim only when the backrests are passenger have properly ad rests are tilted to the rear, th positioning of the belt web!
Exercise caution when se wards position. Injuries can care and attention.
Fig. 94 Front left seat controls
A1
A1
A2
A3
A4
Seats and stowage136
cles without Climatronic
mb wheel fig. 95 to switch on the seat
ng is switched off in the 0 position.
cles with Climatronic
ch on the seat heating.
eating at maximum level (level 3).
eating at medium level (level 2).
t seat heating at minimum level (level 1).
sed four times, the heating goes off and
0).
hen the ignition is switched on. The left thumb
d the right thumb wheel the right seat.
g elements, please do not kneel on the seat or
le point to the seat cushion and backrest.
altea_EN Seite 136 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Heated seats*
The front seat cushions and backrests can be heated electri-
cally.
Front seat heating for vehi
Turn the appropriate thu
heating. The seat heati
Front seat heating for vehi
Press button to swit
Press once to set seat h
Press twice to set seat h
Press three times to se
When the button is pres
the LED goes out (level
The seat heating only works w
wheel controls the left seat an
Caution To avoid damaging the heatin
apply sharp pressure at a sing
Fig. 95 Thumb wheel for the front seat heating
Fig. 96 Front seat heating with Climatronic
AA
Seats and stowage 137
Safety Fir Technical Data
orwards or backwards independently. The
/3 of the seat. There are various possible
unlock the lever in the direction of the
forwards or backwards to the desired
t
e top. Pull the loop on the side of the seat
rection of the arrow and hold the loop in
backrest to the required position and
n the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, your ly while the vehicle is moving. This could
ent and therefore, injury.
s down until the seat is moved, this is to avoid le.
e moved, is fixed in position.
aximum luggage compartment space, put the
, without moving.
aximum space without putting the seatbacks
d to the desired position.
altea_EN Seite 137 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Rear seat bench
Seat adjustment
The seats may be moved f
movement can be 1/3 or 2
positions.
Adjusting reach
In the seated position,
arrow fig. 97.
Move the seat cushion
position.
Backrest angle adjustmen
Hold the backrest at th
fig. 98 in the di
this position. Push the
release the loop.
WARNING
Adjust the seat only whe seat could move unexpected increase the risk of an accid
Do not push the seatback damage to the centre conso
Ensure that the seat, onc
Note In order to maintain the m
seatbacks in position normal
In order to maintain the m
down, move the seats forwar
Fig. 97 For unlocking the rear seat
Fig. 98 Rear seat back- rest angle adjustment
A1
Seats and stowage138
ckrests down
e of the seat fig. 100 in the direc-
t the seat backrest into position.
backrest has engaged properly in position
on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be
krest into position ensure that the seat belts
Fig. 100 Folding or opening the front seat backrests
A1
altea_EN Seite 138 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Folding the seat backrests down
Pull the loop on the side of the seat fig. 99 .
In this position the back rest is locked. This is the reason why the loop located
on the side of the seat must be pulled in the direction of the arrow to open the
backrest.
WARNING
You should check that the backrest has engaged properly in position after the loop is released.
The locking system loops on the seats may not, for reasons of safety, be used to secure any items.
Folding the rear seat ba
Pull the loop on the sid
tion of the arrow and lif
WARNING
You should check that the after the loop is released.
The locking system loops used to secure any items.
After locking the seat bac protrude from the seat.
Fig. 99 Folding or opening the rear seat backrests
A1
Seats and stowage 139
Safety Fir Technical Data
t with stowage area
in the armrest.
rea, lift the armrest up in the direction of
nd then lift the cover.
r* or the lower stowage area, pull on the
pressing on the button.
rea, push the armrest down.
ea closed while the vehicle is in motion to the armrest during a sudden braking
f an accident.
Fig. 102 Front armrest with stowage area
altea_EN Seite 139 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Stowage compartments
Stowage compartment on the front passenger side
The compartment can be opened by pulling the lever fig. 101.
WARNING
Always keep the stowage compartment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion in order to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sudden braking or by an accident.
Centre arm rest at fron
There is a stowage area
To open the stowage a
the arrow fig. 102 a
To access the CD loade
armrest cover without
To close the stowage a
WARNING
Always keep the stowage ar reduce the risk of injury from manoeuvre or in the event o
Fig. 101 Passenger side: stowage compartment
Seats and stowage140
aximum weight of 1.5 kg.
er cover open. There is an injury risk for eased in case of sudden braking or an
to the rear of the front seat backrests.
it up in the direction of the arrow
Fig. 104 Folding table of front left seat
altea_EN Seite 140 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Note The CD changer is located in this compartment.
Stowage areas under the front seats*
There is a stowage locker with a cover under each front seat.
The drawer* fig. 103 is opened by pushing the button and putting the
cover back.
There are two open positions of 15 and 60 degrees depending on the pres-
sure applied to the cover. In the 60 degree position, the cover will collapse if
too much pressure is applied.
To close the drawer, press the cover until it locks into position.
WARNING
The drawers will hold a m
Do not drive with the draw passengers if the cargo is rel accident.
Folding table*
Folding tables are fitted
To open the table, open
fig. 104.
Fig. 103 Stowage area under the front seats
AA
Seats and stowage 141
Safety Fir Technical Data
e cover to open these compartments
will then open.
ss it up until it engages.
ea cover closed while the vehicle is in motion uring a sudden braking manoeuvre or in the
prevent any items from being thrown through
altea_EN Seite 141 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
The folding tables may not be folded down whilst the vehicle is in motion and anyone is seated on the second row of seats. There is a risk on injury during a sudden braking manoeuvre! The table must therefore be closed and properly secured whilst the vehicle is in motion.
Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
Caution When driving, do not leave open cans in the cup holders. The drink might be
spilt on braking, for example, and could damage the vehicle.
Roof stowage compartment*
There are four stowage compartments in the roof
Press the button on th
fig. 105. The cover
To close the cover, pre
WARNING
Always keep the stowage ar to reduce the risk of injury d event of an accident and to the vehicle interior.
Fig. 105 Roof stowage compartments
Seats and stowage142
rtment floor and fold it back all the way
fig. 107, into the side grooves depending
ts to be transported. The onboard tool kit
e located underneath the luggage
ed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier
move.
m authorised weight for the vehicle
altea_EN Seite 142 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Stowage in the luggage compartment*
There is a variable stowage area* in the luggage compart-
ment floor.
Lift the luggage compa
fig. 106.
Fit the separator on the size of the objec
and the spare wheel ar
compartment.
Note The folding table is design
loads fold up the table and re
Do not exceed the maximu
page 285.
Fig. 106 Foldable luggage compartment cover
Fig. 107 Luggage compartment divider
AA
Seats and stowage 143
Safety Fir Technical Data
ound:
d rear),
ggage compartment,
in the luggage compartment (only on vehicles
e kit*.
d on the rear roof handles.
ts on the dashboard. These objects could be compartment when the vehicle is moving (e.g. or cornering) and distract the driver. Risk of
n fall from the centre console or other stowage ll while the vehicle is moving. In the event of a you will not be able to use the brake, clutch or .
at hooks must not restrict the driver's view. oks are intended only for use with light arti-
e any hard, sharp or heavy objects in hanging udden braking manoeuvres or accidents, espe- deployment, these objects could injure the
altea_EN Seite 143 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Luggage compartment net
There is a retaining net in the luggage compartment for
securing objects.
Use the fastening rings located on the side of the luggage
compartment to attach the retaining net fig. 108.
Note The folding table is designed for a maximum load of 50 kg. For heavier
loads fold up the table and remove.
Do not exceed the maximum authorised weight for the vehicle
page 285.
Other stowage areas
Other stowage areas can be f
in the centre console,
in the door trims (front an
in the side trims of the lu
in the spare wheel recess
with an optional anti-punctur
The clothes hooks are locate
WARNING
Do not store loose objec flung through the passenger while accelerating, braking accident.
Ensure that no objects ca areas into the driver foot we sudden braking manoeuvre, accelerator. Risk of accident
Clothing hung on the co Risk of accident. The coat ho cles of clothing. Do not leav articles of clothing. During s cially those involving airbag vehicle occupants.
Fig. 108 Retaining net
Seats and stowage144
rest*
Fig. 110 Opening the rear drink holders
Fig. 111 Rear armrest/drink holder
altea_EN Seite 144 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Drinks holders at the front
In the centre console, in front of the gear lever, there are two drink holders
fig. 109.
WARNING
Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During normal or sudden driving manoeuvres, sudden braking or an accident, the hot drink could be spilled. Danger of scalding.
Never use rigid materials (for example, glass or ceramic), these could cause injury in the case of an accident.
Rear drink holder* / Arm
Fig. 109 Front drink holder
Seats and stowage 145
Safety Fir Technical Data
mpartment
ction of the rear seat back rest, in order to
n of the back rest.
compartment mounting plate
side of the vehicle, through the rear
hould be fitted between the back rest and
seat area.
clips the cushion frame. The rings of the
rtment mounting plate appear at the front
the plate clip, tilt the rear back rest of the
slightly and then lean the back rest back-
ng of the mobile stowage compartment
te easier.
Fig. 113 Mobile stowage compartment mounting plate
AH
altea_EN Seite 145 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Opening and closing the armrest* / drink holder*
To open, pull the loop in the direction of the arrow page 144,
fig. 110 .
To close, lift the Drink holder* / armrest* in the direction of the
arrow page 144, fig. 111 .
WARNING
Ensure that the load in the luggage compartment is correctly secured with the retainer net when travelling with the armrest down page 143.
Multi-purpose* mobile stowage compartment - Fitting and removal
This stowage compartment may only be placed in the central
area of the rear seat
Fitting mobile stowage co
Fold down the small se
access the large sectio
Fit the mobile stowage
fig. 113 from the in
section of the seat. It s
the seat, in the central
Push the plate until it
mobile stowage compa
of the seat.
If it is difficult to make
large section forwards
wards to make the fitti
onto the mounting pla
A1
A2
Fig. 112 Mobile stowage compartment Installation
Seats and stowage146
stowage compartment - General
ent may only be placed in the central
Fig. 114 Mobile stowage compartment Opening
Fig. 115 Mobile stowage compartment Duties
altea_EN Seite 146 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Place the mobile stowage compartment onto the foam of the
central seat.
Set both mounting pieces together page 145, fig. 112,
with both mounting rings page 145, fig. 113 and press
hard until both the clips completely connect with the rings.
Removing mobile stowage compartment
Pull each of the buttons page 145, fig. 112 on the clips
(red buttons) forwards, until they snap out of place.
Fold the larger seat down and remove the mobile stowage
compartment mounting plate.
Multi-purpose* mobile information
This stowage compartm
area of the rear seat
AE
AG
AF
Seats and stowage 147
Safety Fir Technical Data
ing, keep the tables stored inside the mobile the cover closed, and likewise when they are
the drink holders. The drink may spill and le is moving.
drink holder when the vehicle is in motion, n may be flung around the vehicle and cause
ting plate is correctly clipped onto the cushion
use, store inside the stowage compartment.
e compartment is not in use, it should always net in the luggage compartment.
wage compartment is correctly fitted, pulling it
ox and checking that both safety clips are
gs.
altea_EN Seite 147 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Opening
Lift the cover , in area page 146, fig. 114.
Closing
Push the cover down, until it clips into place.
Uses of the mobile stowage compartment
The front open glove box may be used to store small objects that will not
damage passengers in the event that the objects are flung around the interior
of the vehicle.
The drink holders are used for holding drink cans or cups.
The elastic belt on the side may be used for keeping papers and maga-
zines.
The tables may be used as a support for writing.
To use the table page 146, fig. 115, it must be removed from its
compartment on the side of the mobile stowage compartment and fitted into
compartment page 146, fig. 115 on the front section of the mobile
stowage compartment.
The table in the right-hand compartment is fitted in the left-hand compart-
ment of the front of the mobile stowage compartment and the table in the left-
hand compartment is fitted in the right-hand compartment.
The tables have two positions for use and cannot be interchanged.
WARNING
The mobile stowage compartment supports a maximum load of 5 kg. Do not overload.
Do not drive when the cover of the mobile stowage compartment is open.
Do not drive when the tables are set up for use.
When the vehicle is mov stowage compartment with not in use
Never place hot drinks in cause burns when the vehic
Do not leave cans in the there is a danger that the ca injury.
Make sure that the moun frame.
When the plate is not in
When the mobile stowag be fastened by the retaining
Note Check that the mobile sto
forwards by the front glove b
correctly clipped onto the rin
AB AA
AC
AD
WARNING (continued)
Seats and stowage148
ighter fig. 117 to activate it .
op out slightly.
hter and light the cigarette on the
tte lighter can lead to serious injuries or start
. Carelessness or negligence when using the urns, risk of injury.
en the ignition is turned on or the engine is fire, never leave children alone inside the
Fig. 117 The cigarette lighter is located in the electric socket on the front of the centre console
altea_EN Seite 148 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Ashtrays*, cigarette lighter* and electrical sockets
Ashtray*
Opening and closing the ashtray
To open the ashtray, lift the cover fig. 116.
To close, push the cover down.
Emptying the ashtray
Extract the ashtray and empty it.
WARNING
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a fire.
Cigarette lighter*
Press on the cigarette l
Wait for the lighter to p
Pull out the cigarette lig
glowing coil.
WARNING
Improper use of the cigare a fire.
Using the lighter carefully cigarette lighter can cause b
The lighter only works wh running. To avoid the risk of vehicle.
Fig. 116 Ashtray located in the front drink holder
Seats and stowage 149
Safety Fir Technical Data
iances with the engine switched off will cause a
l accessories, see the instructions on
tion (AUX-IN)*
ig. 119.
possible (see Radio manual).
Fig. 119 Auxiliary audio connection
altea_EN Seite 149 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Electrical sockets
Electrical equipment can be connected to any of the 12 volt
sockets.
Electrical accessories may be connected to the 12 volt power point in the front
central console fig. 118 of the passenger compartment and that of the
boot* The appliances connected to each power point must not exceed a
power rating of 120 Watt.
WARNING
The current power points and the connected accessories will only operate when the ignition is on or when the engine is running. Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, never leave children alone inside the vehicle.
Note The use of electrical appl
battery discharge.
Before using any electrica
page 218.
Auxiliary audio connec
Lift the AUX. cover f
Insert the pin as far as
Fig. 118 Socket, centre console, front
Seats and stowage150
e use of this equipment, please see the Radio
Fig. 121 Connection in central armrest compart- ment
altea_EN Seite 150 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
AUX RSE connection*
This connector may be used as an audio input (red and white connectors) or
audio and video connector (red, white and yellow connectors). For more
details about the use of this audio and video source, see the RSE manual.
MEDIA-IN* connector
For information concerning th
handbook.
Fig. 120 AUX RSE connection
Seats and stowage 151
Safety Fir Technical Data
ed in a stowage box under the luggage compart-
n this storage compartment, turn the knob* 90
t part of the vehicle's standard equipment.
tinguisher
a stowage box on the left side of the luggage
hed to the luggage compartment carpet by
re extinguisher are not part of the vehicle's
ply with legal requirements.
f the contents of the first aid kit. You should
soon as possible after the shelf-life date of the
t comply with legal requirements.
uisher is fully functional. The fire extinguisher
d regularly. The sticker on the fire extinguisher
te for checking.
ries and emergency equipment see the instruc-
res page 218.
altea_EN Seite 151 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
First-aid kit, warning triangle, fire extinguisher
Warning triangle
The warning triangle* is locat
ment cover fig. 122. To ope
fig. 123.
Note The warning triangle is no
First-aid kit and fire ex
The first-aid kit* is located in
compartment.
The fire extinguisher* is attac
Velcro.
Note The first-aid kit and the fi
standard equipment.
The first aid kit must com
Observe the expiry date o
purchase a new first-aid kit as
first-aid kit has expired.
The fire extinguisher mus
Ensure that the fire exting
should, therefore, be checke
will inform you of the next da
Before acquiring accesso
tions in Accessories and spa
Fig. 122 Warning triangle storage under the rear cover
Fig. 123 Opening the storage compartment
Seats and stowage152
d chafe against the wires of the heating
d cause damage.
f the rear side windows must not be covered as
ing extracted from the vehicle.
altea_EN Seite 152 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Luggage compartment
Stowing luggage
All luggage must be securely stowed.
Please observe the following points to ensure the vehicle handles
well at all times:
Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment
as possible.
Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps
on the fastening rings.
WARNING
Loose luggage and other loose items in the vehicle can cause serious injuries.
Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly move and change the way the vehicle handles.
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects in the passenger compartment can be flung forward, injuring vehicle occupants.
Always store objects in the luggage compartment and secure with suit- able straps. This is especially important for heavy objects.
When you transport heavy objects, always take in account that a change in the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.
Please observe information on safe driving page 7, Safe driving.
Caution Hard objects on the shelf coul
element in the rear window an
Note The ventilation slots in front o
this would prevent stale air be
Seats and stowage 153
Safety Fir Technical Data
its slot, in its rest position and pull
compartment should remain closed.
mpartment
partment by turning the knob* 90
compartment is freed from the pivot point
bjects on the open stowage compartment, the vehicle occupants in case of sudden
e, ensure that the stowage compartment tray is
mean that the rear stowage tray is not correctly
damaged.
remove the tray.
items of clothing on the luggage compartment
uced.
a storage compartment*, it should only be used
les and light-weight articles.
altea_EN Seite 153 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Rear shelf
Removing the cover
Unhook the loops fig. 124 from housings
Extract the cover from
outwards. The storage
To remove the storage co
Open the storage com
page 151, fig. 123.
Pull outwards until the
fig. 125.
WARNING
Do not place heavy or hard o because they will endanger braking.
Caution Before closing the tailgat
correctly fitted.
An overloaded boot could
seated and it may be bent or
If the boot is overloaded,
Note Ensure that, when placing
cover, rear visibility is not red
If the vehicle is fitted with
to store the emergency triang
Fig. 124 Storage shelf
Fig. 125 Removing storage shelf
AB AA
Seats and stowage154
altea_EN Seite 154 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Roof carrier*
Please observe the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:
For safety reasons, only luggage racks and accessories approved by SEAT
should be used.
It is imperative to precisely follow the fitting instructions included for the
rack, taking special care when fitting the front bar in the holes designed for
this and the rear bar between the marks on the upper part of the rear door
frame while respecting the correct direction of travel indicated in the installa-
tion manual. Not following these instructions may damage the bodywork.
Pay special attention to the tightening torque of the attachment bolts and
check them following a short journey. If necessary, retighten the bolts and
check them at regular intervals.
Distribute the load evenly. A maximum load of 40 kg only is permitted for
each roof carrier system support bar, the load must be distributed evenly
along the entire length. However, the maximum load permitted for the entire
roof (including the support system) of 75 kg must not be exceeded nor should
the total weight of the vehicle be exceeded. See the chapter on Technical
Data.
When transporting heavy or large objects on the roof, any change in the
normal vehicle behaviour due to a change in the centre of gravity or an
increased wind resistance must be taken into account. For this reason, a suit-
able speed and driving style must be used.
For those vehicles fitted with a sunroof*, ensure that it does not interfere
with the load on the roof carrier system when opened.
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 155
Safety Fir Technical Data
is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
ne has reached its operating temperature.
hed off automatically approximately 20 minutes
n also be switched off beforehand by pushing
vents strong odours in the outside air from
or example when passing through a tunnel or in
g. 126 On the dash panel there are the heating ntrols
altea_EN Seite 155 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning
Heating
Controls and equipment
Using the controls fig. 126 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button or
. When the function is activated, the display window in the
lower left of the button is lit.
Temperature
With the regulator the heating level is determined. The required tempera-
ture inside the vehicle cannot be lower than the ambient temperature.
Maximum heat output, which
only available when the engi
Rear window heater
This function will be switc
after being switched on. It ca
the button
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode pre
entering the vehicle interior, f
queuing traffic .
Fi co
A1 A4 A5
A2
A3
A1
A2
A3
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning156
altea_EN Seite 156 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by heating the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the air from outside.
Air distribution
Control for setting the flow of air in the required direction.
Air distribution towards the windscreen. If the windscreen air output is
on and the air recirculation mode is pressed, this remains active. When the
recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution towards the windscreen mode
is selected, the recirculation mode is deactivated. For safety reasons, the air
recirculation mode should not be connected.
Air distribution to the upper body.
Air distribution to footwell
Air distribution to the windscreen and the foot well.
Blower
The air flow can be set at four speeds with the control . The air flow should
always be set at the lowest speed when driving slowly.
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensa- tion. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. The windows can quickly fog over if the heating is switched off. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
Note Please observe the general notes page 165.
A4
A5
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 157
Safety Fir Technical Data
w heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
20 minutes after switching on. It can also be
by pushing the button.
tion mode page 159
page 158
four speed settings for the air flow. The air flow
the lowest speed when driving slowly.
must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. ood visibility. Please familiarise yourself with heating and ventilation system, including the r the windscreens.
g. 127 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
altea_EN Seite 157 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Climatic*
Control switches
The climatic or semi-automatic air conditioning system only works
when the engine is running and the turbine is switched on.
Using the controls fig. 127 and and the control you
can set the temperature, air distribution and the turbine speed.
To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button ,
or . When the function is activated, the display window in
the lower corner of the button is lit.
Temperature selector page 158
Button Heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system on/off
page 158
Button Rear windo
matically approximately
switched off beforehand
Button Air recircula
Air distribution control Blower switch. There are
should always be set at
WARNING
For road safety all windows This is essential to ensure g the correct operation of the anti-fog/defrost functions fo
Fi
A1 A4 A5
A2
A3 A4
A1
A2 AC
A3
A4
A5
A6
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning158
tioning using the button page 157,
lector anti-clockwise until the desired
ed.
to one of the settings 1-4.
. 128 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
altea_EN Seite 158 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Note Please observe the general notes page 165.
Heating and cooling the interior
Interior heating
Turn the temperature selector fig. 128 clockwise to select
the required temperature.
Turn the blower switch to one of the settings 1-4.
Set the air distribution control to the air flow configuration
desired: (towards the windscreen), (towards the chest),
(towards the footwell) and (towards the windscreen and
footwell areas).
Interior cooling
Switch on the air condi
fig. 127 .
Turn the temperature se
cooling output is reach
Turn the blower switch
Fig
A1
AC
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 159
Safety Fir Technical Data
ants and prevents misting of the windows when
igh.
cannot be switched on this may be caused by
nning.
f.
is below +3C.
m compressor has been temporarily switched
nt temperature is too high.
is faulty.
le. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-
e.
g. 129 On the dash panel: Climatic controls
altea_EN Seite 159 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Use the air distribution control to guide the flow of air in the
required direction: (to the windscreen), (to the upper
body), (to the foot well) and (to the windscreen and to the
foot well).
Heating
Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows quickly, is
only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occup
the ambient air humidity is h
If the air conditioning system
the following reasons:
The engine may not be ru
The blower is switched of
The outside temperature
The air conditioning syste
off because the engine coola
The air conditioning fuse
Another fault in the vehic
ified workshop.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells from coming from the outsid
Fi
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning160
altea_EN Seite 160 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Air recirculation mode page 159, fig. 129 prevents strong odours in
the outside air from entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing
through a tunnel or in queuing traffic.
With low temperatures outside, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the heating system by warming the air inside the passenger compart-
ment rather than the cold air from outside.
With high ambient temperatures, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ness of the air conditioning system by cooling the air inside the passenger
compartment rather than the ambient air.
If the windscreen air output is on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
this remains active. When the recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
towards the windscreen mode is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
vated. For safety reasons, the air recirculation mode should not be
connected.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air conditioning system is switched off, the windows can quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the air recirculation mode switched on for a long time (risk of accident).
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 161
Safety Fir Technical Data
ted separately for the left and right sides of the
ction for the windscreen. The air drawn in from
ected at the windscreen. The air recirculation
l be switched off as soon as the defrost function
ratures over 3C, the air conditioning system will
ically and the blower speed will be increased by
he air. The button is lit in yellow and the symbol
avigator display.
distribution
istribution
air distribution
g. 130 On the dash panel: 2C Climatronic controls
altea_EN Seite 161 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
2C-Climatronic*
Control switches
The controls allow separate adjustment of air conditioning settings for the left and right.
The air conditioning system controls the temperature when the
engine is running and the blower is switched on.
Turn the temperature control knobs fig. 130 or in order
to adjust the temperature on the left hand side or the right hand
side respectively.
The functions will be switched on when its buttons are pressed.
When these functions are activated, they are indicated on the
radio display. In addition, all these functions are lit with LEDs.
Press the button again to switch off the function.
The temperature can be adjus
vehicle interior.
Button defrost fun
outside the vehicle is dir
mode, if switched on, wil
is switched on. At tempe
be switched on automat
one level in order to dry t
appears on the radio or n
Button Upward air
Button Central air d
Button Downward
Fi
A9 A14 A1
A2
A3
A4
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning162
ormation
limatronic system can be displayed
d navigation screen mounted at
Fig. 131 Navigation display with information about the Climatronic
Fig. 132 Radio display with information about Climatronic
altea_EN Seite 162 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Button Manual air recirculation mode.
Button Rear window heating. The heating will be switched off auto-
matically approximately 20 minutes after switching on. However, it may
be turned off by pushing the button. The button lights up yellow and the
symbol appears in the display.
Button Automatic temperature, ventilation and air distribution
control page 163
button - Dual zone synchroniser
Button Switches the 2C-Climatronic on and off page 164
Blower control page 164
button Switches heating, ventilation and air-conditioning system
on
WARNING
For road safety all windows must be clear of ice, snow, and condensation. This is essential to ensure good visibility. Please familiarise yourself with the correct operation of the heating and ventilation system, including the anti-fog/defrost functions for the windscreens.
Note Please observe the general notes page 165.
Viewing Climatronic inf
Information about the C
on the radio or radio an
factory.
A5
A6
A7 AUTO
A8 DUAL
A9 OFF
A10
A11 AC
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 163
Safety Fir Technical Data
ghtly higher or lower depending on the ambient
tant temperature. The temperature of the air
lower speed and the air distribution are regu-
m also considers the sunlight radiation, so
adjustment. Therefore, automatic mode almost
fort for the vehicle occupants throughout the
off whenever an adjustment is made using the
n, air flow or or the air recirculation button
tinue to be regulated within the parameters
r.
es:
calculates the air flow for two people.
calculates the air flow for more than two
altea_EN Seite 163 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The LEDs on the Climatronic controls indicate that the selected function has
been activated.
In addition, the radio or radio and navigation displays mounted at factory
briefly display the current settings of the Climatronic if any are modified.
The symbols used on the radio or radio and navigation displays are the same
as the symbols used for the Climatronic controls.
Automatic mode
In automatic mode air temperature, air flow and distribution
are automatically regulated so that a specified temperature is
attained as quickly as possible and then maintained.
The temperature can be adjusted separately for the left and right
sides of the vehicle interior.
Switching on automatic mode
Press the page 161, fig. 130 button. AUTO High is
shown on the radio display (high fan speed).
Press the button again page 161, fig. 130. AUTO Low
is shown on the radio display (low fan speed).
Depending upon the version and finish, the vehicle may include:
When a temperature of 22C (72F) is set in automatic mode a comfortable
interior climate is quickly reached. Therefore, we recommend you not to
change this adjustment, except as necessary to suit individual preferences or
particular circumstances. The compartment temperature can be set between
+18C (64F) and +26C (80F). These are approximate temperatures and the
actual temperature may be sli
conditions.
Climatronic maintains a cons
supplied to the interior, the b
lated automatically. The syste
there is no need for manual re
always provides the best com
year.
Automatic mode is switched
buttons for the air distributio
. The temperature will con
manually selected by the use
Note There are two automatic mod
Automatic mode LO: This
Automatic mode HI: This
people.
AUTO
AUTO
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning164
80F) is selected, the display switches to HI In
maximum heating output and the temperature
reely using the control . Always have the
g to ensure a constant flow of fresh air into the
to the minimum -1, turns the Climatronic off.
using the buttons , and . It is also
me of the air vents separately.
system on and off
D lit), the heating, ventilation and air condi-
. 133 On the instrument panel: 2C Climatronic trols.
A10
altea_EN Seite 164 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Manual mode
In manual mode you can adjust the air temperature, air flow and distribution as required.
Switching on manual mode
To enter manual mode, press one of the buttons fig. 133 to
or press the air flow control . The selected function is
shown on the radio or navigator display.
Temperature
There are separate temperature selectors for the left and right sides of the
vehicle interior. The selected temperature is displayed above the selector.
The compartment temperature can be set between +18C (64F) and +26C
(80F). These are approximate temperatures and the actual temperature may
be slightly higher or lower depending on the ambient conditions.
If a temperature below 18C (64F) is selected, the display switches to LO In
this setting the system runs at maximum cooling output and the temperature
is not regulated.
If a temperature above 26C (
this setting the system runs at
is not regulated.
Blower
The air flow may be adjusted f
blower running at a low settin
vehicle. Pushing the button
Air distribution
The air distribution is adjusted
possible to open and close so
Switching the air conditioning
When the button is on (LE
tioning system is on.
Fig con
A1
A5 A10
AC
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning 165
Safety Fir Technical Data
e, the air recirculation increases the effective-
y heating the air inside the passenger compart-
outside.
res, the air recirculation increases the effective-
ystem by cooling the air inside the passenger
ambient air.
s on and the air recirculation mode is pressed,
recirculation mode is on, if the air distribution
e is selected, the recirculation mode is deacti-
air recirculation mode should not be
cold air from the outside enters the vehicle ng system is switched off, the windows can , never leave the air recirculation mode (risk of accident).
d particle filter and active carbon filter) serves
s in the ambient air, including dust and pollen.
m to work with maximum efficiency, the pollen
intervals specified in the Service Schedule.
maturely due to use in areas reaching very high
lter must be changed more frequently than
e.
altea_EN Seite 165 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
When the button is off (LED off), the heating, ventilation and air condi-
tioning system is off.
When the button is off, the heating, ventilation and air conditioning
system is switched off to save fuel. The temperature continues to self-regu-
late. The set temperature can then only be reached if it is higher than the
ambient temperature.
Driver and passenger temperature control
The button controls the synchronisation of the 2 Climatronic climate
zones.
When the button is on (LED lit), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
personalised, for example: Driver side temperature 22C and passenger side
temperature 23C.
When the button is off (LED off), the climate zone of the Climatronic is
synchronised, for example: Driver side temperature 22C and passenger side
temperature 22C.
If the button is off and the passenger side temperature is changed, the
function is automatically activated.
Air recirculation mode
Air recirculation mode prevents fumes or unpleasant smells
from coming from the outside.
Press the button page 164, fig. 133 to switch air recir-
culation mode on or off. It is switched on if the following symbol
appears in the display .
Air recirculation mode prevents strong odours in the ambient air from
entering the vehicle interior, for example when passing through a tunnel or in
a traffic jam.
With low temperatures outsid
ness of the heating system b
ment rather than the air from
With high ambient temperatu
ness of the air conditioning s
compartment rather than the
If the windscreen air output i
this remains active. When the
towards the windscreen mod
vated. For safety reasons, the
connected.
WARNING
In air recirculation mode, no interior. If the air conditioni quickly mist over. Therefore switched on for a long time
General notes
The impurity filter
The impurity filter (a combine
as a barrier against impuritie
For the air conditioning syste
filter must be replaced at the
If the filter loses efficiency pre
pollution levels, the pollen fi
stated in the Service Schedul
AC
AC
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
DUAL
A2
Heating, Ventilation and Air conditioning166
front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and
cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the
s through the passenger compartment and is
r this purpose. Therefore, do not cover these
other objects.
operates most effectively with the windows
osed. However, if the vehicle has been over-
an be cooled quicklier by opening the windows
irculation mode is on, as smoke drawn into the
s a residue on the evaporator, producing a
he air conditioning at least once a month, to
nd prevent leaks. If a decrease in the cooling
rised Service Centre should be consulted to
altea_EN Seite 166 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Air conditioner
When the air conditioning system is switched on, not only the temperature,
but also the air humidity in the vehicle interior is reduced. This improves
comfort for the vehicle occupants and prevents misting of the windows when
the ambient air humidity is high.
If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on this may be caused by
the following reasons:
The engine is not running.
The button is disconnected.
The outside temperature is below +3C.
The air conditioning system compressor has been temporarily switched
off because the engine coolant temperature is too high.
The air conditioning fuse is faulty.
Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioning checked by a qual-
ified workshop.
Caution If you suspect that the air conditioning is damaged, switch it off with the
button to prevent further damage and have it checked by a qualified
workshop.
Repairs to the air conditioning system require specialist knowledge and
special tools. Therefore, we recommend you to take the vehicle to a qualified
workshop.
Note If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and so forming a puddle
underneath the vehicle. This is completely normal and there is no need to
suspect a leak.
Keep the air intake slots in
leaves to ensure heating and
windows from misting over.
The air from the vents flow
extracted by slots designed fo
slots with items of clothing or
The air conditioning system
and the sliding/tilting roof* cl
heated by sun, the air inside c
for a short time.
Do not smoke while air rec
air conditioning system leave
permanent unpleasant odour.
It is advisable to connect t
lubricate the system gaskets a
capacity is detected, an Autho
check the system.
AC
AC
Driving 167
Safety Fir Technical Data
o the correct position.
e steering column fig. 134 down
eel in this way until the correct position is
again firmly .
ring column adjustment function and an incor- ult in serious injury.
teering column should be adjusted only when
Fig. 135 Proper sitting position for driver
altea_EN Seite 167 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Driving
Address
Adjusting the steering wheel position
The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely
adjusted to suit the driver.
Adjust the driver seat t
Push the lever under th
.
Adjust the steering wh
set fig. 135.
Then push the lever up
WARNING
Incorrect use of the stee rect seating position can res
To avoid accidents, the s the vehicle is stationary.
Fig. 134 Adjusting the steering wheel position
Driving168
programme (ESP)*
safer in certain situations.
gramme (ESP) includes the electronic differen-
ntrol system (TCS), the brake assist system
programme (TSP). The ESP function works
arning lamps will light up if the ESP or ABS
lly when the engine is started.
annot be switched off. With the ESP switch it is
f.
hen in cases where wheel sliding is desirable.
ains,
Fig. 136 Detail of the centre console: ESP button
altea_EN Seite 168 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Adjust the driver seat or steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and your chest page 167, fig. 135. If you fail to observe the minimum distance, the airbag will not protect you. Risk of fatal injury.
If your physical constitution does not allow you to maintain the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact an Authorised Service Centre. The Authorised Service Centre will help you to decide if special specific modifi- cations are necessary.
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it points towards your face, the driver airbag will not protect you properly in the event of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel points towards your chest.
When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel, or on the inside of the rim). In such cases, you could receive severe injuries to the arms, hands and head.
Safety
Electronic stabilisation
ESP helps make driving
The electronic stabilisation pro
tial lock (EDS), the traction co
(BAS) and the trailer stability
together with the ABS. Both w
systems are faulty.
The ESP is started automatica
The ESP is always active, and c
only possible to switch TCS of
The TCS can be deactivated w
For example:
When driving with snow ch
WARNING (continued)
Driving 169
Safety Fir Technical Data
key
g lock
e ignition and the engine are OFF and the
te without the ignition key, turn the steering
dible sound. You should always lock the
e your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle
glow plug system on
sition and release it. If the key cannot be turned
osition to position , move the steering
loosens up.
Fig. 137 Ignition key positions
A0
A1
A0 A1
altea_EN Seite 169 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces,
when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it from mud, for
example.
Next, the button should be pressed to reactivate the TCS.
When does the warning light switch on or flash?
On switching the ignition on, it lights up for about two seconds to carry
out a function control.
The warning lamp will start flashing when the vehicle is moving if the ESP
or the TCS is activated. The warning lamp will light up slowly if the TCS is
switched off.
It will light up continuously if there is a malfunction in the ESP.
WARNING
The electronic stabilisation programme (ESP) cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESP in page 193, Intelligent technology.
Ignition lock
Position of the ignition
Ignition switched off, steerin
In this position fig. 137 th
steering may be locked.
For the Steering lock to opera
wheel until it locks with an au
steering wheel when you leav
theft .
Switching the ignition or the
Turn the ignition key to this po
or it is difficult to turn from p
wheel back and forth until it
Driving170
ted again automatically as soon as you pull the
using a genuine SEAT key with its correct code.
icle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.
ping the engine
tarted using a genuine SEAT key with
he neutral position and depress the
and hold it in this position for the starter
the starting page 169 position.
y as soon as the engine starts; the starter
with the engine.
e, you may need to slightly press down the
ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
ause for concern.
altea_EN Seite 170 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Starting
The engine is started when the key is in this position. Electrical components
with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.
Every time the vehicle is started again, the ignition key must be turned to
position . The repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition prevents
possible damage to the starter motor if the engine is already running.
WARNING
The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be immediately blocked- Risk of accident!
Always remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even for a short period. This is especially important if children or disabled people are left alone in the vehicle. They could accidentally start the engine or work electrical equipment such as the electric windows, conse- quently resulting in an accident.
Unsupervised use of the keys could start the engine or any electrical system, such as the electric window. This could result in serious injury.
Caution The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key
position ).
Electronic immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents unauthorised persons from driving
the vehicle.
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser auto-
matically when the key is inserted into the ignition.
The immobiliser will be activa
key out of the ignition lock.
The engine can only be started
Note A perfect operation of the veh
Starting and stop
Starting petrol engines
The engine can only be s
its correct code.
Move the gear lever to t
clutch pedal thoroughly
to turn the engine on.
Turn the ignition key to
Let go of the ignition ke
motor must not run on
After starting a very hot engin
accelerator.
When starting a very cold eng
seconds until oil pressure has
This is quite normal, and no c
A2
A0
A2
Driving 171
Safety Fir Technical Data
started using a genuine SEAT key with
the neutral position and depress the
y and hold it in this position for the starter
the starting position.
position page 169, fig. 137 . The
ll light for engine pre-heating.
p turns off, turn the key to position to
t press the accelerator.
ey as soon as the engine starts, the starter
wed to run on with the engine.
ine, it may be a little noisy for the first few
s built up in the hydraulic valve compensators.
ause for concern.
the engine, see page 275.
sel engine
rging of the battery, do not use any other major
e glow plugs are pre-heating.
e glow plug warning lamp page 80 goes out.
fuel tank has been completely run dry
pletely run dry, it may take longer than normal
e engine after refuelling with diesel fuel. This is
minate air first.
A1
A2
altea_EN Seite 171 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If the engine does not start immediately, switch the starter off after
10 seconds and try again after half a minute. If the engine still does not start,
the fuel pump fuse should be checked page 261, Fuses.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow
the instructions page 275, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Starting diesel engines
The engine can only be
its correct code.
Move the gear lever to
clutch pedal thoroughl
to turn the engine on.
Turn the ignition key to
Turn the ignition key to
indication lamp wi
When the warning lam
start the engine. Do no
Let go of the ignition k
motor must not be allo
When starting a very cold eng
seconds until oil pressure ha
This is quite normal, and no c
If there are problems starting
Glow plug system for the die
To avoid unnecessary discha
electrical equipment while th
Start the engine as soon as th
Starting the engine after the
If the fuel tank has been com
(up to one minute) to start th
because the system must eli
Driving172
, the radiator fan may run on for up to 10
t the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant
the heat accumulated in the engine compart-
xposure to solar radiation.
ff until the vehicle is completely stationary.
ly when the engine is running. With the rength is needed to brake. As normal brake ed, risk of accidents and serious injury may
mmediately blocked once the key is removed hicle cannot be steered. Risk of accident.
hard for a long period, the engine could over-
isk of engine damage. For this reason, you
rox. 2 minutes before you switch it off.
altea_EN Seite 172 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
WARNING
Never start or run the engine in unventilated or closed rooms. The exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of consciousness. It can also cause death.
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running.
Never use cold start sprays, they could explode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Risk of injury.
Caution When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at
full throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine damage.
The vehicle should not be pushed or towed more than 50 metres to start
the engine. Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Before attempting to push-start or tow a vehicle in order to start it, you
should first try to start it using the battery of another vehicle. Note and follow
the instructions page 275, Jump-starting.
For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary.
You should drive off as soon as you start the engine. This helps the engine
reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.
Switching the engine off
Stop the engine.
Turn the ignition key to position page 169, fig. 137 .
After switching the engine off
minutes. It is also possible tha
temperature increases due to
ment or due to its prolonged e
WARNING
Never switch the engine o
The brake servo works on engine switched off, more st operation cannot be perform exist.
The steering lock can be i from the ignition lock. The ve
Caution If the engine has been driven
heat when it is switched off. R
should idle the engine for app
A0
Driving 173
Safety Fir Technical Data
l to LPG
tomatically switches from petrol to LPG
tions are met:
e tank.
hicle coolant is above 30C.
g is above 1200 rpm.
ssed and the warning light ON is flashing or
en it was switched off.
et, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON
petrol
itches from LPG to petrol in the following cases:
d.
g. 138 Centre console: gas system control warning hts and switch.
A3
altea_EN Seite 173 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Driving with LPG*
switch.
Warning light OFF Running on petrol
Warning light ON Running on LPG
Your SEAT vehicle has a bivalent engine able to run on either LPG or petrol.
The LPG tank page 221, Refuelling with LPG is in the spare wheel well
.
It is possible to change from LPG to petrol while the engine is running, even
if the vehicle is moving, by pressing the button fig. 138 . The
selected operating mode is shown by the lights OFF (running on petrol)
and ON (running on LPG).
Starting the engine
The engine is always started with petrol, even when LPG was being used
when it was switched off.
Automatic switch from petro
After checking, the system au
provided the following condi
There is enough LPG in th
The temperature of the ve
Engine speed while drivin
The button is pre
the engine was using LPG wh
When these conditions are m
lamp is lit .
Automatic switch from LPG to
The system automatically sw
When the engine is starte
If the LPG tank is empty.
Fi lig
A1 GAS
A2
A3
GAS A1
A2
A3
GAS A1
A3
Driving174
are made, especially when the outside temper-
nd to run on petrol more often than on LPG.
empty before the LPG tank.
n*
on
ps the engine when the vehicle is
matically when required.
pped, put it in neutral and release the
e will stop.
is pressed, the engine starts again.
creen displays information about the
function page 176, fig. 140.
s
be buckled.
closed.
rating temperature
e straight.
t ground.
reverse.
cted.
altea_EN Seite 174 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
If there is a fault in the LPG system.
At very low temperatures below minus 10C.
Manual switch from petrol to LPG
Press the GAS button to switch modes. When the necessary conditions are
met, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON lamp is lit. If the ON
lamp flashes, the following conditions have not been met:
There is enough LPG in the tank.
The temperature of the vehicle coolant is above 30C.
Engine speed while driving is above 1200 rpm.
When these conditions are met, the system switches to LPG mode and the ON
lamp is lit .
Manual switch from LPG to petrol
Press the button to switch modes. When the OFF lamp is lit, the
vehicle is running on petrol.
Running on petrol
Run the engine with petrol for short journeys at regular intervals to avoid
problems in the petrol system.
WARNING
LPG is a highly explosive and inflammable substance. It may cause severe burns and other injury.
Due care must be taken to avoid any risk of fire or explosion.
When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage), make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Note If frequent short journeys
ature is low, the vehicle will te
Therefore, the petrol tank may
Start-Stop functio
Description and operati
The Start-Stop function sto
stopped and starts it auto
When the vehicle is sto
clutch pedal. The engin
When the clutch pedal
The instrument panel s
status of the Start-Stop
Start-Stop function condition
The driver's seat belt must
The engine hood must be
The engine must be at ope
The steering wheel must b
The vehicle must be on fla
The vehicle must not be in
A trailer must not be conne
A1
A3
A3
A3
GAS A1 A2
Driving 175
Safety Fir Technical Data
ove with the engine off for any reason. You hicle. This could cause an accident and serious
t work when the engine is not running. You vehicle.
does not work when the engine is not running. difficult to turn the steering wheel.
-Stop function and a manual gearbox, when the
ust be pressed.
he Start-Stop function are not fulfilled, the dash
indicator dimmed.
ed by rotating the steering wheel three times,
altea_EN Seite 175 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
The temperature of the passenger compartment must be within the
convenience limits (button page 164, fig. 133 should be selected).
The windscreen de-mist function must be off.
If not, it requires an increase in airflow page 164, fig. 133 for more
than three presses.
Either of the temperature settings, HI or LO must not be set.
The driver's door must be closed.
The diesel particulate filter must not be in regeneration mode, for diesel
engines.
The battery charge must not be low for the next start.
The battery temperature must be between -1C and 55C.
The parking assistant, Park Assist* must not be activated.
Interrupting the Start-Stop function
In the following situations, the Start-Stop function will be interrupted and the
engine will automatically start:
The vehicle is moving.
The brake pedal is pressed several times in a row.
The battery has been discharged excessively.
The Start-Stop System has been manually deactivated.
The windscreen de-mist function is turned on.
The temperature of the passenger compartment exceeds the convenience
limits (button page 164, fig. 133 should be selected).
If in an increase in airflow page 164, fig. 133 is required for more
than three presses.
Either of the temperature settings, HI or LO, is selected.
The engine coolant temperature is insufficient.
The alternator is faulty, for example the V-belt has ruptured.
If any of the conditions described in the previous section are not fulfilled.
WARNING
Never allow the vehicle to m could lose control of your ve injury.
The brake servo does no need more force to stop the
Power assisted steering That is why it is much more
Note For vehicles with the Start
engine is started, the clutch m
When the conditions for t
panel displays the Start-Stop
The vehicle can be restart
that is, more than 270.
AC A11
A10
AC A11
A10
Driving176
by the Start-Stop function, this is displayed on
the dash panel; the display of indications on
Fig. 140 Display on the dash panel during Start- Stop function operation.
altea_EN Seite 176 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Deactivating and activating the Start-Stop function
Every time the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is
automatically switched on.
Manually deactivating the Start-Stop function
Press the fig. 139 located in the centre console. When the
Start-Stop function is deactivated, the pushbutton indicator
lights.
If the Start-Stop function is operating then the engine starts
immediately.
Manually activating the Start-Stop function
Press the fig. 139 located in the centre console. The indi-
cator on the button will go out.
Driver messages
When the engine is turned off
the dash panel.
Note There are different versions of
the screen may differ.
Fig. 139 The Start-Stop function button.
AA
AA
Driving 177
Safety Fir Technical Data
r
tationary with the engine idling. Press the
ly.
to neutral and push the lever downwards.
the left, and then into the reverse position
k.
engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When
fore engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds
thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.
en the reverse gear is selected and the ignition
ing, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a tch released.
gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of acci-
the gear rest when driving. The pressure of your
wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.
should always depress the clutch down fully to
damage.
e clutch uphill. This causes premature wear
altea_EN Seite 177 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Manual gearbox
Driving a car with a manual gearbox
Engaging the reverse gea
The vehicle should be s
clutch down thorough
Place the gear lever in
Slide the gear lever to
shown on the gear stic
The reverse gear can only be
the engine is running and be
with the clutch pressed down
The reverse lights light up wh
is on.
WARNING
When the engine is runn gear is engaged and the clu
Never select the reverse dent.
Note Do not rest your hand on
hand could cause premature
When changing gear, you
avoid unnecessary wear and
Do not hold the car on th
and damage to the clutch.
Fig. 141 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual gearbox
Fig. 142 Detail of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox
Driving178
/ direct shift gearbox has three
gramme
s a higher gear earlier rather than remain
to position D to drive forwards
to position R to reverse. This position is
es for reversing.
mme
ion S.
me, S, the program is designed for a sports
ich changes up at higher engine speeds to use
Fig. 144 Program selec- tion
altea_EN Seite 178 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Automatic gearbox* / DSG automatic gearbox
Selector lever positions
Selector lever positions indicated on the cover
P Parking position (lever locked).
R Reverse position.
N Neutral position (lever locked). This position is similar to the neutral
position for manual gearboxes).
D Drive position (economic driving programme).
S Sports driving position.
+/- Tiptronic driving position (this programme is similar to the operation of
a manual gearbox).
Driving programmes
The automatic gearbox
programmes.
Selecting the economy pro
This programme select
in a lower gear.
Put the selector lever in
Put the selector lever in
shared by all programm
Selecting the sport progra
Move the lever to posit
If you select the sport program
mode, that is, a programme wh
Fig. 143 Centre console: selector lever for auto- matic gearbox / direct shift gearbox DSG
Driving 179
Safety Fir Technical Data
brake pedal, at the same time press the
lever.
en the vehicle is stopped or at a speed of less
s, the lock is automatically released in position
(e.g. from R to D) the lever will not lock. If the
N more than one second then it is locked. With
is prevented passing from P and N to any other
e brake pedal.
t in the position P in order to remove the key.
tic gearbox* / DSG automatic
ears are automatically engaged.
Fig. 146 Driving
altea_EN Seite 179 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
the full power of the engine. This programme is not recommended for use on
the motorway or in the city.
Selecting the manual programme (tiptronic)
This programme allows driving similar to a manual gearbox.
This programme may be accessed using the selector lever or from the
steering wheel controls when this option is fitted page 181.
Selector lever locking
The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged
inadvertently, which would cause the vehicle to move.
Releasing the selector lever lock
Start the vehicle.
Press and release the
button on the selector
The lock is only activated wh
than 5 km/h. At higher speed
N.
For rapid changes of position
lever remains in the position
the automatic lock, the lever
gear without first pressing th
The selector lever must be pu
Driving with an automa gearbox
The drive and reverse g
Fig. 145 Deactivating the lock
Driving180
cases, using the foot brake to prevent
hicle using another forward gear (engine
, release the brake and accelerate.
ower the gear must be for effective engine
ar is used on a very steep gradient, the engine
icle accelerates. So that the engine speed does
rbox changes to the next highest gear. Depress
selector lever to the Tiptronic gate to return to
ave the vehicle while the engine is running or ny reason you must leave the vehicle with the ndbrake and move the selector lever to posi-
ng and the positions D, S or R are selected, it le with the foot brake because the vehicle will
anging the position of the selector lever (risk
ever be moved into the positions R or P while
gradient, reduce speed and use the Tiptronic gear.
altea_EN Seite 180 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Driving
Press and hold the foot brake.
Press on the button on the selector lever knob (on the left,
page 179, fig. 146.
Select a gear for driving (R, D or S).
Release the button and wait a few seconds for the gear to
engage, a light jerk will be felt.
Release the brake and accelerate.
Short stop
Hold the vehicle stationary with the brake pressed down (for
example at traffic lights). The selector lever does not need to be
put into the positions P or N for this.
Do not press the accelerator.
Parking the vehicle
Press the foot brake and hold to bring the vehicle to a stop.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Press in the button on the selector lever knob, move the lever to
the position P and release the button.
Driving slowly
Move the selector lever to the position D and press to the right to
put the lever into Tiptronic mode.
Press the gear lever towards (-) to select a lower gear.
Hill stop
Hold the vehicle, in all
rolling back.
Do not try to slow the ve
braking).
Descending gradients
With the gear engaged
The steeper the gradient the l
braking. For example, if 3rd ge
braking is insufficient and veh
not become excessive, the gea
the brake pedal and move the
3rd gear.
WARNING
The driver should never le with any gear selected. If for a engine running, apply the ha tion P.
When the engine is runni is necessary to hold the vehic creep at a low speed.
Never accelerate while ch of an accident).
The selector lever must n moving (risk of an accident).
Before descending a steep programme to select a lower
Driving 181
Safety Fir Technical Data
nic* mode*
lows the driver to manually select
Fig. 147 Changing gear with Tiptronic
Fig. 148 Steering wheel with levers for automatic gearbox
altea_EN Seite 181 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If you must stop on a hill, always hold the vehicle using the footbrake to avoid rolling back.
The footbrake must not be held for a long period of time, not even lightly; continuous braking will cause overheating of the brakes and a reduction or even a loss of braking power and a significant increase in braking distances.
Never allow the vehicle to coast down a gradient with the selector lever in positions N or D, even when the engine is not running. For descents, the use of the Tiptronic programme is recommended to keep the speed reduced.
Caution Never use the automatic gearbox to hold the vehicle stationary on a hill,
even for short periods, as this may overheat the gearbox and cause damage.
Apply the handbrake or depress the foot brake to hold the vehicle in position.
If the vehicle is allowed to roll with the engine stopped but the selector in
position N then the gearbox may be damaged because it will not be
lubricated.
Changing gear in Tiptro
The Tiptronic system al
gears
WARNING (continued)
Driving182
or sport programme using the steering wheel
81, fig. 148 are used in the normal or sport
hes temporarily to Tiptronic mode. To exit
the right paddle lever towards the steering
econd. You will also leave Tiptronic mode if
ed for a certain time.
e steering wheel can operate with the gear stick
ehicle in motion.
designed to give maximum accelera-
wn thoroughly, the gearbox automatically
speed and engine speed, into a lower gear to
imum acceleration of the vehicle.
gear until the engine reaches the maximum
the gear.
vehicle if you accelerate on slippery road ry.
en using the kickdown features on slippery leration, the vehicle could lose traction and
+
altea_EN Seite 182 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
General information about driving in Tiptronic mode
Changing gear with the gear stick
Put the lever in position D and press towards the right to enter
the Tiptronic gate page 181, fig. 147.
Press the gear lever forwards page 181, fig. 147 to select
a higher gear.
Press the gear lever back page 181, fig. 147 to select a
lower gear.
Changing gear with the steering wheel levers
Press the right paddle lever (+OFF) towards the steering
wheel to change up page 181, fig. 148.
Press the left paddle towards the steering wheel to change
down page 181, fig. 148.
Using the levers on the steering wheel, you can access manual driving mode
regardless of the driving mode pre-selected.
General information about driving in Tiptronic mode
When accelerating, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox goes into a
higher gear a little before it reaches the maximum permitted revolutions.
If a lower gear is selected, the automatic gearbox / direct shift gearbox does
not change down until the point is reached where the engine could no longer
over-rev.
If the Tiptronic is selected whilst the vehicle is in motion and the automatic
gearbox / direct shift gearbox is in 3rd gear in selector lever position D, the
Tiptronic will then also be in 3rd gear.
Changing gears in the normal paddle levers
If the paddle levers page 1
programme, the system switc
Tiptronic mode again, press
wheel for approximately one s
the paddle levers are not mov
Note The gearbox controls on th
in any position and with the v
Kickdown feature
The kickdown feature is
tion.
If you press the accelerator do
changes down, depending on
take full advantage of the max
The gearbox does not change
determined engine speed for
WARNING
You could lose control of the surfaces. Risk of serious inju
Be particularly careful wh road surfaces. With fast acce skid.
A+
A
A+
A
Driving 183
Safety Fir Technical Data
er up firmly fig. 149.
ly and press the release knob in the direc-
. 149 and guide the handbrake lever down
firmly. This prevents you driving with the hand-
lights up when the handbrake is applied
. The warning turns off when the handbrake is
h with the handbrake on, the following
nstrument panel display: HANDBRAKE ON. Also,
to stop the vehicle when it is in motion. The ably longer, because braking is only applied to dent!
sed, this will cause rear brakes overheating, n of the brake system and could lead to an acci- ature wear on the rear brake pads.
before you leave the vehicle. The first gear
altea_EN Seite 183 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
You should use the kickdown feature only when traffic and weather conditions allow it to be used safely.
Handbrake
Using the handbrake
The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the
vehicle from accidentally rolling away.
Always apply the handbrake when you leave your vehicle and when
you park.
Applying the handbrake
Pull the handbrake lev
Releasing the handbrake
Pull the lever up slight
tion of the arrow fig
fully .
Always apply the handbrake
brake applied .
The handbrake warning lamp
and the ignition switched on
released.
If you drive faster than 6 km/
message* will appear on the i
an audible warning is given.
WARNING
Never use the handbrake braking distance is consider the rear wheels. Risk of acci
If it is only partially relea which can impair the functio dent. This also causes prem
Caution Always apply the handbrake
should also be selected.
WARNING (continued)
Fig. 149 Handbrake between the front seats
Driving184
exhaust system could ignite inflammable low bushes, spilt fuel etc.
ants to remain in the vehicle when it is e to open the vehicle from the inside, and vehicle in an emergency. In the event of an l delay assistance to occupants.
e in the vehicle. They could set the vehicle in sing the handbrake or the gear lever /
nditions, it may become extremely hot or cold e fatal.
luded in vehicles with ESP.
g uphill.
conditions: doors closed, brake pedal pressed
he system is activated on engaging gear.
he brake pedal, the braking force is maintained
he vehicle from moving backward when
ce of time is enough to start the vehicle with
reversing uphill.
altea_EN Seite 184 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Parking
The handbrake should always be firmly applied when the
vehicle is parked.
Always note the following points when parking the vehicle:
Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.
Apply the handbrake.
The first gear should also be selected.
Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition lock.
Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.
Always take you car keys with you when you leave the vehicle
.
Additional notes on parking the vehicle on gradients:
Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle rolls against the kerb if it started
to roll.
If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they
point towards the kerb.
If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they
point away from the kerb.
Secure the vehicle as normal by applying the handbrake firmly and
engaging first gear.
WARNING
Take measures to reduce the risk of injury when you leave your vehicle unattended.
Never park where the hot materials, such as dry grass,
Never allow vehicle occup locked. They would be unabl could become trapped in the emergency, locked doors wil
Never leave children alon motion, for example, by relea selector lever.
Depending on weather co inside the vehicle. This can b
Hill-start aid*
This function is only inc
This device helps when startin
These are the basic operation
down and vehicle in neutral. T
After removing your foot from t
for a few seconds to prevent t
engaging gear. This short spa
ease.
This system also works when
WARNING (continued)
Driving 185
Safety Fir Technical Data
g aid works properly, the sensors must be kept
e.
Description
n acoustic parking aid.
r bumper. When the sensors detect an obstacle,
ignals (beeps). The measuring range of the
ith increasing frequency as you approach the
less than approx. 0.30 m away from the
ill sound continuously. Do not drive on!
eps will be gradually reduced after about 4
s at a constant distance from a detected
e permanent acoustic signal).
n automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
dgement tone.
eplacement for driver awareness. The driver is afe parking and other manoeuvres.
pots in which obstacles are not registered. ildren and animals because the system will not
e 0,60
ntre 1,60
altea_EN Seite 185 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
If you do not start the vehicle immediately after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the vehicle may start to roll back under certain conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.
If the engine stalls, depress the brake pedal or use the hand brake immediately.
When following a line of traffic uphill, if you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back accidentally when starting off, hold the brake pedal down for a few seconds before starting off.
Note The Official Service or a specialist workshop can tell you if your vehicle is
equipped with this system.
Parking aid acoustic system*
General notes
Various systems are available to help you when parking or manoeuvring in
tight spaces, depending on the equipment fitted on your vehicle.
The SEAT parking system* gives an acoustic warning if there are any obsta-
cles behind your car.
When you are parking, the SEAT Parking System plus* warns you acoustically
and optically20) about obstacles in front of and behind the vehicle.
Note To ensure the acoustic parkin
clean and free of snow and ic
SEAT Parking System:
The parking system is a
Sensors are located in the rea
you are alerted by acoustic s
sensors starts at about:
The acoustic signals sound w
obstacle. When the vehicle is
obstacle, the warning tone w
The volume of the warning be
seconds if the vehicle remain
obstacle (it does not affect th
The parking aid is switched o
You will hear a brief acknowle
WARNING
The parking aid is not a r personally responsible for s
The sensors have blind s Always look out for small ch
20) Vehicles with a navigation system.
Rear Sid
Ce
Driving186
ith increasing frequency as you approach the
less than approx. 0.30 m away from the
ll sound continuously. Stop moving immedi-
eps will be gradually reduced after about 4
at a constant distance from a detected
permanent acoustic signal).
igator
the central console fig. 150 or on the
will hear a brief acknowledgement tone
tch will light up.
Fig. 150 Centre console: Switch for parking aid
altea_EN Seite 186 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.
Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear-view mirrors.
Caution Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give
any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,
thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the
system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
Note Please refer to the notes on towing page 187.
SEAT Parking System Plus*: Description
The parking system plus is an acoustic and optical parking
aid.
Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect
an obstacle, you are alerted by acoustic and optical signals. The measuring
range of the sensors starts at about:
The acoustic signals sound w
obstacle. When the vehicle is
obstacle, the warning tone wi
ately!
The volume of the warning be
seconds if the vehicle remains
obstacle (it does not affect the
Enabling/Disabling
Enabling
Connects the radio nav
Press the switch on
gear selector gate. You
and the LED on the swi
Front Side 0,90
Centre 1,20
Rear Side 0,60
Centre 1,60
WARNING (continued)
Driving 187
Safety Fir Technical Data
n towing page 187.
he picture display.
ing sensors are not enabled when you select
ch . This function may not be guaranteed on
actory fitted. This results in the following restric-
ning. The system will still give a warning when
driving forwards. The optical display changes to
w seconds and the LED on the switch * starts
the parking aid, a system fault has occurred.
n Authorised SEAT dealer or specialised work-
altea_EN Seite 187 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Disabling
Drive forwards faster than 10 km/h, or
Press the switch or
Switch the ignition off.
Segments in the optical display
Some colour segments in front and behind and an acoustic signal enable the
driver to assess the distance with respect to an obstacle. The amber colour
segments combined with a discontinuous beep indicate the presence of an
obstacle. As the vehicle gets closer to the obstacle, the colour of the segment
changes to red and the acoustic signal beeps continuously. When the penul-
timate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the
collision zone. Stop moving immediately! .
WARNING
The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.
The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered. Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid acci- dents.
Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear-view mirrors.
Caution Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be
registered by the sensors as the car moves closer, so the system will not give
any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains,
thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be detected by the
system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.
Note Please refer to the notes o
There is a slight delay in t
Towing bracket
In towing mode, the rear park
reverse gear or press the swit
towing brackets that are not f
tions:
SEAT Parking System*
No warning is given
SEAT Parking System Plus:*
There is no rear distance war
obstacles are detected while
towing mode.
Fault messages
If you hear a long beep for a fe
flashing when you switch on
Please refer the problem to a
shop.
Driving188
tain a constant speed when descending down-
due to its own weight. Use the foot brake to
ntrol system on and off
151 to the left to ON.
to the right to OFF or turn the ignition
stationary.
nd a speed is programmed, the indicator on
Fig. 151 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AB
AB
altea_EN Seite 188 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Note If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be
indicated by the flashing LED on the switch the next time you switch on
the parking aid.
Cruise control* (Cruise control - GRA)
Description
The cruise control system is able to maintain the set speed in
the range from approx. 30 km/h to 180 km/h.
Once the speed setting has been saved, you may take your foot off the accel-
erator.
WARNING
It could be dangerous to use the cruise control system if it is not possible to drive at constant speed.
For safety reasons the cruise control system should not be used in dense traffic, in sections with bends or where roads are in bad conditions (e.g. aquaplaning, loose chippings, slippery surfaces, snow). Risk of acci- dent.
Always switch the CCS off when finish to use it in order to avoid an involuntary use.
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Note The cruise control cannot main
hill. The vehicle will accelerate
slow the vehicle.
Switching the cruise co
Switching on the system
Push the switch fig.
Switching off system
Either push the switch
off when the vehicle is
When the cruise control is on a
the instrument panel is lit.21)
Driving 189
Safety Fir Technical Data
d without touching the accelerator or
S/+ of the rocker switch fig. 153 to
e vehicle will continue to accelerate as
ocker switch pressed. When you release
eed is stored.
T/ of the rocker switch to reduce the
automatically reduce its speed for as long
pressed. When you release the switch, the
Fig. 153 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
AA
altea_EN Seite 189 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If the cruise control system is switched off, the symbol is switched off. The
system will also be fully switched off when the 1st gear is selected.*
Setting speed*
Press the lower part SET/- of the rocker switch fig. 152
once briefly when you have reached the speed you wish to set.
When you release the rocker switch, the current speed is set and held
constant.
Adjusting set speed*
The speed can be altere
the brake.
Setting a higher speed
Press the upper part RE increase the speed. Th
long as you keep the r
the switch, the new sp
Setting a lower speed
Press the lower part SE speed. The vehicle will
as you keep the switch
new speed is stored.
21) Depending on the model version
Fig. 152 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AA
Driving190
ssed,
d to over 180 km/h,
d,
d to the position CANCEL without reaching
CANCEL operation is completed, the lever is
ial position.
release the brake or clutch pedal or reduce the
km/h and press once on the upper part of the
4 .
peed which is too high for the current road, . Risk of accident.
ntrol system*
AA
Fig. 155 Indicator and main beam headlight lever: switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
altea_EN Seite 190 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
When you increase speed with the accelerator and then release the pedal, the
system will automatically restore the set speed. This will not be the case,
however, if the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h higher than the stored
speed for longer than 5 minutes. The speed will have to be stored again.
Control of the set speed is switched off if you reduce speed by depressing the
brake pedal. You can reactivate the control by pressing once on the upper part
of the rocker switch RES/+ page 189, fig. 153 .
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the current road, traffic or weather conditions. Risk of accident.
Switching off system temporarily*
The cruise control system will be switched off in the following situations:
if the brake pedal is depressed,
if the clutch pedal is depre
if the vehicle is accelerate
when the ESP or TCS is use
when the lever is move
the OFF position. Once the
released and returns to its init
To resume the cruise control,
vehicle speed to less than 180
rocker switch RES/+ fig. 15
WARNING
It is dangerous to use a set s traffic or weather conditions
Turning off the cruise co
AA
Fig. 154 Indicator and main beam headlight lever switch and rocker switch for the cruise control
AB
Driving 191
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 191 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The system is completely turned off by moving the control all the way to
the right hand side (OFF engaged), or when the vehicle is stationary, ignition
off.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox
To completely disengage the system, the selector lever must be placed in one
of the following positions: P, N, R or 1 or with the vehicle stopped and the
ignition turned off.
AB
altea_EN Seite 192 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Intelligent technology 193
Safety Fir Technical Data
AS)*
(BAS) function is only included in
s brake in time, but not with maximum force.
long braking distances.
venes when you press the brake pedal very
sist system registers an emergency situation. It
e full brake pressure so that the ABS can be acti-
ently, thus reducing the braking distance.
n the brake pedal. The brake assist system
soon as you release the brake.
den braking, the hazard warning lights auto-
hicles behind. The hazard warning lights go off
or the hazard warning light switch is pressed.
gher if you drive too fast, if you do not keep in front, and when the road surface is slippery nt risk cannot be reduced by the brake assist
cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and n with the brake assist system! Therefore, it is
altea_EN Seite 193 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Practical tips
Intelligent technology
Brakes
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works
only when the engine is running.
If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle has
to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to
make up for the lack of servo assistance.
WARNING
The braking distance can also be affected by external factors.
Never let the vehicle coast with the engine switched off. Failure to do so could result in an accident. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
If the brake servo is not working, for example when the vehicle is being towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder than normal.
Brake assist system (B
The Brake Assist System
vehicles with ESP.
In an emergency, most driver
This results in unnecessarily
The brake assist system inter
quickly because the brake as
then very quickly builds up th
vated more quickly and effici
Do not reduce the pressure o
switches off automatically as
Emergency braking function
When the vehicle detects sud
matically come on to warn ve
when the vehicle accelerates
WARNING
The risk of accident is hi your distance to the vehicle or wet. The increased accide system.
The brake assist system wet roads are dangerous eve
Intelligent technology194
m cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery even with ABS! If you notice that the ABS is
d wheels under braking), you should reduce e road and traffic conditions. Do not let the ou into taking any risks when driving.
is also determined by the tyres fitted
es are modified, the effectiveness of the ABS
(TCS)
em prevents the drive wheels from
s accelerating.
he traction control system during acceleration
help prevent the drive wheels of front-wheel
uring acceleration. The system works in the
tion with ABS. If a malfunction should occur in
ut of action.
oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
tically when the engine is started. If necessary,
hing the button on the centre console.
ng lamp is lit. The TCS should normally be left
in exceptional circumstances, when slipping of
it be disconnected for example
altea_EN Seite 194 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
essential that you adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving.
Anti-lock brake system and traction control M-ABS (ABS and TCS)
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system prevents the wheels locking
during braking.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active
safety system.
How the ABS works
If one of the wheels is turns too slowly in relation to the road speed, and is
close to locking, the system will reduce the braking pressure for this wheel.
The driver is made aware of this control process by a pulsating of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or
more of the wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control function has inter-
vened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed
so the ABS can regulate the brake application. Do not pump.
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, the best possible control is
retained as the wheels do not lock.
However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
conditions. The braking distance could even be longer if you brake on gravel
or on fresh snow covering a slippery surface.
WARNING
The anti-lock brake syste and wet roads are dangerous working (to counteract locke speed immediately to suit th extra safety features tempt y
The effectiveness of ABS page 243.
If the running gear or brak could be severely limited.
Traction control system
The traction control syst
spinning when the car i
Description and operation of t (TCS)
TCS reduces engine power to
drive vehicles losing traction d
entire speed range in conjunc
the ABS, the TCS will also be o
TCS helps the vehicle to start m
pery conditions where this ma
The TCS is switched on automa
it may be turned on or off pus
When the TCS is off, the warni
switched on at all times. Only
the wheels is required, should
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 195
Safety Fir Technical Data
ing the wheels to spin. On the other hand, the
drive torque than it could transmit. This causes
on the front shaft, resulting in understeering or
g the ESP sensors and signals, to detect and
the inner wheel thus counteracting the excess
is means that the path requested by the driver
ombination with the ESP and is always active,
l, TCS, is disconnected.
ation programme (ESP)*
tion programme increases the
e road.
rogramme helps to reduce the danger of skid-
rogramme (ESP) consists of ABS, EDL, TCS and endations.
m (ESP)*
idding by braking the wheels individually.
wheel angle and road speed to calculate the
by the driver, and constantly compares them
the vehicle. If the desired course is not being
altea_EN Seite 195 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
With compact temporary spare wheel.
When using the snow chains.
When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces
When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it by rocking.
The TCS should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.
WARNING
It must be remembered that TCS cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by TCS tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution In order to ensure that TCS function correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the ABS and TCS.
XDS*
Driveshaft differential
When taking a bend, the driveshaft differential mechanism allows the outer
wheel to turn at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this way, the wheel
which is turning faster (outer wheel) receives less drive torque than the inner
wheel. This may mean that in certain situations the torque provided to the
inner wheel is too high, caus
outer wheel receives a lower
an overall loss of lateral grip
lengthening of the path.
The XDS system is able, usin
correct this effect.
The XDS, via the ESP, brakes
drive torque in this wheel. Th
is more precise,
The XDS system operates in c
even when the traction contro
Electronic stabilis
General notes
The electronic stabilisa
vehicle's stability on th
The electronic stabilisation p
ding.
The electronic stabilisation p
Steering manoeuvre recomm
Electronic Stabilising Progra
ESP reduces the danger of sk
The system uses the steering
changes of direction desired
with the actual behaviour of
Intelligent technology196
e (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
ting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
d TCS.
(ABS)
vents the wheels locking during braking
ck (EDL)*
al lock helps prevent the loss of trac-
driven wheels starts spinning.
oving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slip-
y otherwise be difficult or even impossible.
olutions of the drive wheels using the ABS
lt the warning lamp for ABS lights up)
ely 80 km/h, it is able to balance out differ-
n wheels of approximately 100 rpm caused by
side of the vehicle. It does this by braking the
and distributing more driving force to the other
al.
e braking wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts
to excessive loads. The vehicle will continue to
. For this reason, the driver is not informed that
f.
utomatically when the brake has cooled down.
altea_EN Seite 196 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
maintained (for instance, if the car is starting to skid), then the ESP compen-
sates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable
condition. If the vehicle tends to oversteer, the system will act on the front
wheel on the outside of the turn.
Steering manoeuvre recommendations
This is a complementary safety function included in the ESP This function aids
the driver to better stabilize the vehicle in a critical situation. For example, in
case of sudden braking surface with varied adherence, the vehicle will tend
to destabilize its trajectory to the right to or to the left. In this case the ESP
recognizes the situation and helps the driver with a counter steering
manoeuvre from the power steering.
This function simply provides the driver with a recommended manoeuvre in
critical situations.
The vehicle doesn't steer itself with this function, the driver has full control of
the vehicle at all times.
WARNING
It must be remembered that ESP cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.
Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by ESP tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution In order to ensure that ESP functions correctly, all four wheels must be
fitted with the same tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can
cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.
Modifications to the vehicl
gear or any components affec
ciency of the ABS, EDL, ESP an
Anti-lock brake system
The anti-lock brake system pre
page 194.
Electronic differential lo
The electronic differenti
tion caused if one of the
EDL helps the vehicle to start m
pery conditions where this ma
The system will control the rev
sensors (in case of an EDL fau
page 81.
At speeds of up to approximat
ences in the speed of the drive
a slippery road surface on one
wheel which has lost traction
driven wheel via the differenti
To prevent the disc brake of th
out automatically if subjected
function normally without EDL
the EDL has been switched of
The EDL will switch on again a
Intelligent technology 197
Safety Fir Technical Data
lly designed to complement the superior engine
s the car exceptional handling and performance
l roads and in more difficult conditions, such as
, your car will have plenty of traction in winter
ndard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend
tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when
pected, mainly because this will give a better
are mandatory, this also applies to cars with
rive, all four tyres must have the same rolling
e, you should always adjust your speed to suit e extra safety features tempt you into taking re to do so could result in an accident.
f your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip. rent from a vehicle without four-wheel drive. e too fast on icy or slippery roads just because ration in these conditions. Failure to do so
d that the front wheels may start to aqua- the road if the car is driven too fast. If this
e no sudden increase in engine speed when rn the driver, as with a front-wheel drive car.
mentioned above, always choose a driving
altea_EN Seite 197 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels may start to spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability.
Always adapt your driving style to suit road conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you into taking any risks when driving, this can cause accidents.
Caution Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the engine, the brake system, running
gear or any components affecting the wheels and tyres) could affect the effi-
ciency of the EDL page 218.
The traction control system (TCS)
The traction control system prevents the drive wheels from spinning when the
car is accelerating page 194.
Four-wheel drive*
On four-wheel drive models, the engine power is distributed
to all four wheels
General notes
The four-wheel-drive system operates completely automatically. The propul-
sion force is distributed among the four wheels and adapted to the driving
style and the road conditions.
The four-wheel drive is specia
power. This combination give
capabilities both on norma
snow and ice.
Winter tyres
Thanks to its four-wheel drive
conditions, even with the sta
that winter tyres or all-season
winter road conditions are ex
braking response.
Snow chains
On roads where snow chains
four-wheel drive.
Changing tyres
On vehicles with four-wheel d
circumference page 248.
WARNING
Even with four-wheel driv the conditions. Do not let th any risks when driving. Failu
The braking capability o Vehicle behaviour is no diffe So do not be tempted to driv the car still has good accele could result in an accident.
On wet roads bear in min plane and lose contact with should happen, there will b aquaplaning begins to wa For this reason and for that
Intelligent technology198
se, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads
.
irt to build up on the brake pads and corrosion
is used infrequently, or if you only drive low
akes very much.
uently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is
and disks by braking firmly a few times from a
.
d ever increase suddenly, this may mean that
as failed. Drive immediately to the nearest qual-
ault rectified. On the way to the dealer, be
on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stop-
brake system if the brake fluid level is too low.
red electronically.
pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The
the engine is running.
s to clean off deposits on the pads and discs, re not to inconvenience or endanger other
ot move while in neutral, when the motor is ld result in an accident.
altea_EN Seite 198 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
speed suitable for the road conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Brakes
What factors can have a negative effect on the brakes?
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 400 km
they must be run in. However, the reduced braking capacity may be
compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid over-
loading the brakes during run-in.
Wear
The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and
the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for
instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts
and stops.
Wet roads; road salt
When the velocity is over 80 km/h windscreen wipers are on, the brake
system moves the pads towards the brake discs for a few seconds. This
occurs - without warning to the driver - at regular intervals and requires a
more rapid response from the brakes when driving on wet roads.
In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the car or driving
through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter
by ice) on the discs and brake pads. The brakes should be dried by pressing
the pedal to restore full braking effect.
The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the car is
driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt
on the road in winter. In this ca
has to wear off before braking
Corrosion
There may be a tendency for d
to form on the discs if the car
mileages without using the br
If the brakes are not used freq
advisable to clean off the pads
moderately high speed
Faults in the brake system
If the brake pedal travel shoul
one of the two brake circuits h
ified workshop and have the f
prepared to use more pressure
ping distances.
Low brake fluid level
Malfunctions can occur in the
The brake fluid level is monito
Brake servo
The brake servo amplifies the
brake servo works only when
WARNING
When applying the brake select a clear, dry road. Be su road users. Risk of accident.
Ensure the vehicle does n stopped. Failure to do so cou
WARNING (continued)
Intelligent technology 199
Safety Fir Technical Data
will be required than usual. The fault should be
shop as soon as possible.
ork if the engine is off. In this case the steering
rning limit when the car is stationary, this will
e power steering system. Turning the steering
d on the system, which causes noise. It will also
e engine.
do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for
wise, there is a risk of damaging the power
uld fail at any time or the engine is switched off
ed), the car can still be steered. However, more
the steering wheel.
malfunctioning, please take the car to a quali-
ssible.
es a special hydraulic fluid. The container is
rtment (front left). The correct fluid level in the
power steering to function properly. The
d at the Inspection Service.
altea_EN Seite 199 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Caution Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when you do
not really intend to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop-
ping distances and greater wear.
Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed
and change to a lower gear (or move the selector lever to a lower gear position
if your car has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking
and prolongs the service life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes,
it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.
Note If the brake servo is not functioning due to a malfunction, or if the vehicle
has to be towed, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder
to make up for the lack of servo assistance.
If you wish to equip the car with accessories such as a front spoiler or
wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not
obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.
Power steering (servotronic*)
The power steering assists the driver when turning the
steering wheel (with the engine running).
The power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the
steering wheel. In cars equipped with servotronic* power steering the degree
of power assistance is regulated electronically according to road speed.
The power steering will keep on working even if the servotronic* device fails.
The degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to different
speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly, this is
most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for instance
when parking) more effort
corrected by a qualified work
The power steering does not w
wheel is very hard to turn.
If the steering is held at its tu
place an excessive load on th
wheel to its limit places a loa
reduce the idling speed of th
Caution When the engine is running,
more than 15 seconds. Other
steering.
Note If the power steering sho
(for instance when being tow
effort will be required to turn
If the system is leaking or
fied workshop as soon as po
The power steering requir
located in the engine compa
reservoir is important for the
hydraulic fluid level is checke
Driving and the environment200
ing distance
raking distance are influenced by
oad conditions.
pends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate
ends to a great extent on the conditions under
and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often
rt distances or have a sporty driving style, we
thickness of your brake pads checked by an
e frequently than recommended in the Service
r example, after crossing water areas, in heavy
the car, the effect of the brakes is lessened as
n frozen (in winter): The brakes should be
to restore full braking effect.
faults in the brake system increase the risk
run in and do not have the correct friction ever, the reduced braking capacity may be the brake pedal a little harder. This also s are fitted.
, or if you are driving on roads which have g power may set in later than normal.
s are excessively used, they will overheat. ep slopes, it is advisable to reduce speed and r (or move the selector lever to a lower gear if
altea_EN Seite 200 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Driving and the environment
Running-in
Running in a new engine
The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1,500 km.
Up to 1,000 kilometres
Do not drive faster than two thirds of top speed.
Do not accelerate hard.
Avoid high engine revolutions.
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 km
Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed
or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).
During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is
greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.
For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consumption,
reduced.
Braking effect and brak
The braking effect and b
driving situations and r
The efficiency of the brakes de
of wear of the brake pads dep
which the vehicle is operated
drive in town traffic, drive sho
recommend that you have the
Authorised Service Centre mor
Schedule.
If you drive with wet brakes, fo
rainfall or even after washing
the brake discs are wet or eve
dried by pressing the pedal
WARNING
Longer braking distances and of accidents.
New brake pads must be during the first 400 km. How compensated by pressing on applies when new brake pad
If brakes are wet or frozen been gritted with salt, brakin
On steep slopes, if brake Before driving down long ste change down into a lower gea
Driving and the environment 201
Safety Fir Technical Data
to start it, use jump leads if necessary
n running or loss of power when the vehicle is
iately and have the vehicle inspected at the
In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light
symptoms occur page 77. If this happens,
haust system and escape into the environment.
so be damaged by overheating.
hes very high temperatures! Fire hazard!
talytic converter could come into contact with terials under the vehicle.
underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the verter or the heat shields on the exhaust ld catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.
because the irregularity of the fuel supply may
allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust
verheating and damage the catalytic converter.
nvironment rol system is working perfectly, there may be a
aust under some conditions. This depends on
el used. Quite often the problem can be solved
rand.
altea_EN Seite 201 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
your vehicle has automatic transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.
Never let the brakes rub by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.
Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably as the brake servo does not function.
Very heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This impairs the braking effect.
Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Observe the relevant instructions before purchasing accessories page 218, Technical modifications.
If a brake circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased consider- ably. Contact a qualified workshop immediately and avoid unnecessary journeys.
Exhaust gasses purification system
Catalytic converter*
To conserve the useful life of the catalytic converter
Always use unleaded petrol.
Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
For engine oil changes, do not top the reservoir up page 231,
Topping up engine oil .
Never tow the vehicle
page 275.
If you notice misfiring, uneve
moving, reduce speed immed
nearest qualified workshop.
up when any of the described
unburnt fuel can enter the ex
The catalytic converter can al
WARNING
The catalytic converter reac
Never park where the ca dry grass or inflammable ma
Do not apply additional exhaust pipes, catalytic con system. These materials cou
Caution Never fully drain the fuel tank
cause ignition problems. This
system, which could cause o
For the sake of the e Even when the emission cont
smell of sulphur from the exh
the sulphur content of the fu
by changing to another fuel b
WARNING (continued)
Driving and the environment202
0-15%. Next, we provide you with some tips in
ation and, at the same time, save money.
ances
accelerating. When you anticipate the situa-
ten and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible,
engaged, for example, if you see a red light
erves brakes and tyres from wear; the emis-
re reduced to zero (disconnection out of
rgy
l is to change up quickly through the gears.
m in the lower gears uses an unnecessary
first to second gear as quickly as possible. We
ssible, you change to a higher gear upon
e in moderation and avoid the kick-down
the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel
ns and noise levels all increase very rapidly at
erate speeds will help to save fuel.
he engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at level
ith a long red phase. The fuel saved after only
n the amount of fuel needed to restart the
ime to warm up when it is running at idling
ollutant emissions are also especially high
altea_EN Seite 202 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Diesel engine particulate filter*
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced
by burning diesel.
The diesel engine dust filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas
system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving
conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short
trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the indicator for
the diesel engine particulate filter indicator will light. See under Warning
Lights.
WARNING
The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high tempera- tures; it should not enter into contact with flammable materials under- neath the vehicle. Failure to comply could result in fire.
Caution The vehicle is not designed for refuelling with mixtures of FAME fuel
(biodiesel) over 7% in accordance with DIN 51628. The diesel particle filter is
damaged when this mixture percentage is exceeded.
Economical and ecological driving
Economical and environmental driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes
and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an econom-
ical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily
reduce fuel consumption by 1
order to help reduce contamin
Driving ahead of the circumst
A vehicle uses most fuel when
tion, you have to brake less of
let the vehicle roll with a gear ahead. The braking effect pres
sions and fuel consumption a
inertia).
Change gear early to save ene
An effective way of saving fue
Running the engine at high rp
amount of fuel.
Manual gearbox: Change from
recommend that, whenever po
reaching 2,000 rpm.
Automatic gearbox: Accelerat
position.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at
consumption, exhaust emissio
higher speeds. Driving at mod
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off t
crossings or at traffic lights w
30 - 40 seconds is greater tha
engine.
The engine takes a very long t
speed. Mechanical wear and p
Driving and the environment 203
Safety Fir Technical Data
tra wind resistance caused by the roof carrier
nator, which produces electricity. With the need
on is also increased. Because of this, always
when you do not need them. Examples of equip-
ity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window
ness
top priority in the design, choice of materials
eat.
ical recycling
signed for ease of dismantling
acilitate dismantling
rade materials
ers are labelled in accordance with ISO 1043,
can be recycled
rouped together for easy recycling
n manufacture
olatile components
conditioning
aterials laws: cadmium, asbestos, lead,
altea_EN Seite 203 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately
after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you
will not waste fuel. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting gases, the engine and
the exhaust filtration systems should reach the optimum service tempera- ture.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine
does not warm up and fuel consumption does not regularise until having
driven some four kilometres. This is the reason why we recommend avoiding
short trips wherever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the
tyre pressures are just 1 bar too low, this can put the fuel consumption up by
as much as 5 %. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also
increases tyre wear and impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all through the year: they will increase fuel consump-
tion by up to 10 %.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Every kilo of extra weight will put up the fuel consumption, so it is worth
checking the luggage compartment occasionally to make sure that no unnec-
essary loads are being transported.
A roof carrier is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is
no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120 km/h your car will use about 12%
more fuel as a result of the ex
even when it is empty.
Save electrical energy
The engine activates the alter
for electricity, fuel consumpti
turn off electrical equipment
ment that use a lot of electric
heating or the seat heaters*.
Environmental friendli
Environmental protection is a
and production of your new S
Design measures for econom
Joints and connections de
Modular construction to f
Increased use of single-g
Plastic parts and elastom
ISO 11469 and ISO 1629
Choice of materials
Nearly all materials used
Similar types of plastics g
Recycled materials used i
Reduction of the plastic v
CFC-free refrigerant in air
Compliance with prohibited m mercury, chrome VI.
Driving and the environment204
dlights
d drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or
ped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming
apply stickers to certain parts of the headlight
available in your Authorised Service Centre.
headlights, the rotation system must previ-
this, please go to a specialist workshop.
altea_EN Seite 204 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Manufacturing methods
Use of recycled material for manufacturing plastic parts
Solvent-free cavity sealing
Solvent-free wax for protecting the vehicles in transit
Solvent-free adhesives
No CFCs used in production
Surplus materials used extensively for energy conversion and building
materials
Overall water consumption reduced
Heat recovery systems
Water-soluble paint
Driving abroad
Observations
To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:
For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is
available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organisa-
tions will have information about service station networks selling unleaded
fuel.
In some countries, it is possible that a vehicle model is sold under condi-
tions where some spare parts are not available or that the Authorised Service
Centre may only carry out limited repairs.
SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the
technical preparation of your vehicle and also about necessary maintenance
and repair possibilities.
Adhesive strips for hea
If you have to drive a right-han
vice versa, the asymmetric dip
traffic.
To prevent dazzling, you must
lenses. Further information is
In vehicles with self-directing
ously be disconnected. To do
Trailer towing 205
Safety Fir Technical Data
s and draw bar weights that are given on the
ket are for certification purposes only. The
ic model, which may be lower than these figures
ven in the registration documents Section
so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as
trailer must be secured to prevent them
um permissible pressure shown on the sticker
flap. Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in
anufacturer's recommendations.
nough of the road behind the trailer with the
t the case, you should have additional mirrors
hould be mounted on hinged extension
o give sufficient vision to the rear.
trailer. This could result in fatal accidents.
ditional demands on the vehicle. We recom-
ween the normal inspection intervals if the
towing a trailer.
altea_EN Seite 205 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Trailer towing
Instructions to follow
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer when fitted with the correct equip-
ment.
If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have
the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements
for towing a trailer. For the after-market fitting of a trailer towing bracket see
page 207.
Connectors
Your vehicle is fitted with a 12-pin connector for the electrical connection
between the trailer and the vehicle.
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. This is
available in any SEAT dealer.
Trailer weight / draw bar loading
Never exceed the authorised towing limit. If you do not load the trailer up to
the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly
steeper slopes.
The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to
1,000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and
therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced
air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The
weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for
every further 1,000 m (or part thereof). The gross combination weight is the
actual weight of the laden vehicle plus the actual weight of the laden trailer.
When possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted draw bar weight on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified
limit.
The figures for trailer weight data plate of the towing brac
correct figures for your specif
for the towing bracket, are gi
Technical data.
Distributing the load
Distribute loads in the trailer
possible. Loads carried in the
moving.
Tyre pressure
Set tyre pressure to the maxim
on the inside of the fuel tank
accordance with the trailer m
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see e
standard mirrors. If this is no
fitted. Both exterior mirrors s
brackets. Adjust the mirrors t
WARNING
Never transport people in a
Note Towing a trailer places ad
mend additional services bet
vehicle is used frequently for
Trailer towing206
trailer is reduced with increasing speed. For
to drive at the maximum permissible speed in
r or wind conditions. This applies especially
ed immediately if the trailer shows the slightest
top the snaking by increasing speed.
the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be
cking. Select a low gear in due course before
This enables you to use the engine braking to
during prolonged ascents, driving in a low gear
s monitor the temperature indicator for the
am*
ier to stabilise the trailer in case it skids or
altea_EN Seite 206 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Find out whether special regulations apply to towing a trailer in your
country.
Ball coupling of towing bracket*
Depending on the model version, the spherical head on the trailer hook may
be stored in the tool box.
The ball coupling is provided with instructions on fitting and removing the
ball coupling of the towing bracket.
WARNING
The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compartment to prevent them being flung through the vehicle and causing injury.
Note By law, the ball coupling must be removed if a trailer is not being towed
and it obscures the number plate.
Driving tips
Driving with a trailer always requires extra care.
Weight distribution
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very
unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slowly to allow
for the unbalanced weight distribution.
Speed
The stability of the vehicle and
this reason, it is advisable not
an unfavourable road, weathe
when driving downhill.
You should always reduce spe
sign of snaking. Never try to s
Always brake in due course. If
brakes gently at first and then
caused by the trailer wheels lo
going down a steep downhill.
slow down the vehicle.
Reheating
At very high temperatures and
and high engine speed, alway
coolant page 55.
Electronic Stabilisation Progr
The ESP* system makes it eas
swings.
Trailer towing 207
Safety Fir Technical Data
Fig. 156 Attachment points for towing bracket
altea_EN Seite 207 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Fitting a towing bracket*
It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.
Trailer towing208
correctly installed, there is serious danger of
se observe the instructions provided by the racket.
correctly installed, this could cause damage to
.
ng of a trailer bracket is not recommended due
altea_EN Seite 208 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be
completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
The attachment points for the towing bracket are on the lower part of the
vehicle.
The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should
never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and
including the maximum resting weight.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
65 mm (minimum)
350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)
357 mm
569 mm
875 mm
1,040 mm
Fitting a towing bracket
Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore,
before fitting a towing bracket, please contact an Authorised Service Centre
to check whether your cooling system needs modification.
Submit to the legal requirements in your country (e.g. the fitting of a sepa-
rate warning lamp).
Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and
reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a
torque wrench, and an electrical socket must be connected to the vehicle's
electrical system. The above-mentioned require specialized knowledge and
tools.
Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment
points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.
WARNING
Towing brackets should be fitted by specialists.
If the towing bracket is in accident.
For your own safety, plea manufacturer of the towing b
Caution If the electrical socket is in
the vehicle's electrical system
Note For the sports model (FR), fitti
to the design of the bumpers.
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 209
Safety Fir Technical Data
ain products may produce noxious vapours; ventilated areas.
e, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other ic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and explo-
icle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch andbrake firmly and remove the key from the
, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry.
e for cleaning purposes. This could damage the
your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty
nvironment ts for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones
environment.
re products should not be disposed of with ordi-
ve the disposal information on the package.
altea_EN Seite 209 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle
General notes
Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your
vehicle.
Your vehicle maintenance
Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may
also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the
event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.
The best way to protect the car against environmental contaminants is to
wash and wax it frequently. The longer substances such as insects remains,
bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or
road salt and other aggressive materials remain on the vehicle, the more
damage they do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong
sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect.
After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the
underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
Products for vehicle maintenance
Car care products are available in your Authorised Service Centre. Keep the
product instructions until you have used them up.
WARNING
Car care products can be toxic. For this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.
Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the package before using car care products. Improper use could damage your health or
your vehicle. The use of cert they should be used in well
Never use fuel, turpentin volatile fluids. These are tox sion.
Before washing your veh the engine off, apply your h ignition.
Caution Never attempt to remove dirt
Never use a dry cloth or spong
paintwork or the windows of
of water.
For the sake of the e When purchasing produc
which are not harmful to the
The leftovers of the car ca
nary household waste. Obser
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle210
plenty of water and rinse it off.
top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove
ht pressure.
ve often with clean water.
ould only be used for very stubborn dirt.
anels etc. until last with a different
ughly with water.
gently with a chamois leather.
ld, dry the rubber seals and its surfaces
ezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber
avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry
effect and braking distancethe brakes by
nition switched off.
rms from cuts on sharp metal edges when inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of
altea_EN Seite 210 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Vehicle exterior maintenance
Automatic car wash tunnel
The car can normally be washed without problem in an auto-
matic car wash.
The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the car can normally be washed
without problems in an automatic car washing tunnel. However, the paint-
work wear depends to a large extent, on the kind of the car washing tunnel,
the brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative
products.
Before going through a car wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such
as closing the windows and sunroof. There is nothing to note apart from that.
If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof carrier or two-
way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car washing tunnel oper-
ator.
After washing, the brakes could hesitate to respond as the brake discs and
pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking
several times.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of acci- dent.
Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Washing by hand
Vehicle washing
First soften the dirt with
Clean your vehicle from
or a brush. Use very lig
Rinse the sponge or glo
Special car shampoo sh
Clean the wheels, sill p
sponge or glove.
Rinse the vehicle thoro
Dry your vehicle surface
When temperature is co to prevent them from fre
seals.
After washing
Directly after washing,
page 200, Braking
braking several times.
WARNING
Wash your car with the ig
Protect your hands and a cleaning the underbody, the injury.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 211
Safety Fir Technical Data
distance for soft materials and painted
sure cleaner to remove ice or snow from
d jet nozzles (rotating jets) .
avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry
s by braking several times.
concentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at d short cleaning times, visible and invisible es. This may cause an accident.
e brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of
an 60C. This could damage the vehicle.
ehicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive
es, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is
ainted as the paintwork. The closer the nozzle is
wear on the material.
nce requirements
s the paintwork.
r car if water does not form small drops and run
lean.
altea_EN Seite 211 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident.
Caution Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork
or glass on your vehicle.
Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with
a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the
doors, tailgate, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.
For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the car should be washed only in specially provided
wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage
system. In some districts, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.
Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Washing the car with a high pressure cleaner
Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!
Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner,
particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.
Increase the spraying
bumpers.
Do not use a high pres
windows page 212.
Never use concentrate
Directly after washing,
page 200 the brake
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a large spraying distances an damage can occur to the tyr
Water, ice and salt on th accident.
Caution Do not use water hotter th
To avoid damage to the v
materials such as flexible hos
also important for bumpers p
to the surface, the greater the
Vehicle paint maintena
Regular waxing protect
You need to apply wax to you
off the paintwork when it is c
WARNING (continued)
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle212
c parts.
n plastic parts, clean them with approved
nd care products.
ner directly over the air vents of the vehicle may
e liquid is accidentally spilled.
ontain solvents will damage the material.
exterior mirrors
ith commercially available, alcohol based
clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
ove snow from the windows and mirrors.
eather to dry the windows. The chamois
ces are not suitable to clean windows because
sits which could smear the windows.
altea_EN Seite 212 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
A good quality hard wax product is available from your Authorised Service
Centre.
Regular wax applications help to protects the paintwork from environmental
contaminants. page 209. It also protects against minor scratches.
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the car washing tunnel, it is advis-
able to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.
Polishing the paintwork
Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot
be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in
your Authorised Service Centre.
The car must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not contain wax
compounds to seal the paint page 211, Vehicle paint maintenance
requirements.
Caution To prevent damage to the paintwork:
Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matte finish or
on plastic parts.
Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.
Caring for plastic parts
Solvents damage plasti
If normal washing fails to clea
solvent-free plastic cleaning a
Caution The use of liquid air freshe
damage the plastic parts if th
Cleaning products which c
Cleaning windows and
Cleaning windows
Moisten the windows w
glass cleaner.
Dry the windows with a
Removing snow
Use a small brush to rem
Removing ice
Use a de-icer spray.
Use a clean cloth or chamois l
leathers used on painted surfa
they are soiled with wax depo
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 213
Safety Fir Technical Data
nce
looked after, they will not freeze so
ove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.
product to the rubber seals.
ows, bonnet and rear lid will remain pliable and
with a suitable care product (for example sili-
so prevent premature ageing and leaks. The
f rubber seals are well looked after, they will not
can freeze up in winter.
ou should only use spray with lubricating and
th a damp cloth.
ith a soft, dry cloth.
altea_EN Seite 213 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push
it in one direction only without swinging it.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and sili-
cone deposits off.
Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Author-
ised Service Centre. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper
blades to judder. If a window cleanser, specifically for removing wax, is added
to the windscreen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering. Wax
deposits are not removed.
Caution Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and
mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!
The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the
window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers on the heating elements
inside the window.
Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
Clean wiper blades are essential to provide clear vision.
1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen
wiper blades.
2. Use window cleanser to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use
a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn stains.
Rubber seals maintena
If rubber seals are well
quickly.
1. Use a soft cloth to rem
2. Apply a specialist care
The strips on the doors, wind
last longer if they are treated
cone spray).
Caring for rubber seals will al
doors will be easier to open. I
freeze so quickly in winter.
Door lock cylinders
The door lock cylinders
To de-ice the lock cylinders y
anti-corrosive properties.
Cleaning chrome parts
1. Clean chrome parts wi
2. Polish chrome parts w
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle214
s
st from alloy wheels.
ent to clean the wheel rims.
ound to the wheels.
ttention to preserve their appearance. If road
ten removed, the aluminium finish will be
ent for alloy wheel rims.
ents should not be used. If the protective
tone impact, the damaged area should be
ylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances ible and invisible damage can occur to the
ident.
brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of ing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. You plying the brakes carefully several times
altea_EN Seite 214 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains and coatings from the
surface.
Caution To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
Never use an abrasive care product on chrome.
Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.
Steel wheel rims
Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.
Use an industrial cleanser to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on
steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.
Water, ice and salt on the brakes can reduce braking efficiency. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. You must dry the brakes by applying the brakes carefully several times page 200.
Cleaning alloy wheel rim
Every two weeks
Wash salt and brake du
Use an acid free deterg
Every three months
Apply a hard wax comp
Alloy wheels require regular a
salt and brake dust are not of
impaired.
Always use an acid-free deterg
Car polish or other abrasive ag
coating is damaged, e.g. by s
repaired immediately.
WARNING
Never wash tyres with a c and short cleaning times, vis tyres. This may cause an acc
Water, ice and salt on the accident. Directly after wash must dry the brakes by ap page 200.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 215
Safety Fir Technical Data
is usually removed if the engine compartment
ing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned.
ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and
mpartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.
ine compartment, always observe the safety
et, switch the engine off, apply the parking ove the key from the ignition.
before you clean the engine compartment.
underbody, wheel arches without protecting ay cut yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. lt in injury.
the brakes may affect braking efficiency. Risk shing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.
fan. It is temperature-controlled and could en the key is removed from the ignition!
nvironment could be removed when the engine is washed.
leaned in an oil separator. For this reason,
rried out only by a qualified workshop or a petrol
altea_EN Seite 215 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Underbody sealant
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical
and mechanical damage.
The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you to
check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and
reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.
We recommend you to go to your Authorised Service Centre to carry out repair
work and additional anti-corrosion work.
WARNING
Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite! Fire hazard.
Cleaning the engine compartment
Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.
Anti-corrosion treatment
The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti-
corrosion treatment at the factory.
Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the car is
frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the vehicle,
the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and
after winter.
Your Authorised Service Centre has got the necessary equipment to provide
the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we recommend
having this work performed by them.
The anti-corrosion protection
is cleaned with grease remov
On commissioning this work,
components in the engine co
WARNING
When working in the eng warnings page 226.
Before opening the bonn brake firmly and always rem
Allow the engine to cool
Do not clean the vehicle your hands and arms. You m Failure to comply could resu
Moisture, ice and salt on of accident. Directly after wa
Never touch the radiator start automatically, even wh
For the sake of the e Fuel, grease and oil deposits
The polluted water must be c
engine washing should be ca
station.
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle216
bric trim cleaning
m on the doors, headlining etc. can be cleaned
r or with dry foam and a soft brush.
climate controls
ate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more
olution may be used.
ollen cloth with water and wipe over the
be removed using a mild soap solution
ablespoons diluted in one litre of water)
k through the leather or soak into the
ft, dry cloth.
reated twice a year with a special leather-
in your Authorised Service Centre.
altea_EN Seite 216 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Vehicle interior maintenance
Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning
Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash
panel.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special
solvent-free plastic cleaning product.
WARNING
Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleansers containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag triggered, disintegrating plastic parts could cause substantial inju- ries.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Wooden trim cleaning*
Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.
If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap
solution.
Caution Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.
Cloth seat covers and fa
Cloth seat covers and fabric tri
with a special interior cleanse
Cleaning the radio and
To clean the radio and/or clim
resistant dirt, a neutral soap s
Leather cleaning*
Normal cleaning
Moisten a cotton or wo
leather surfaces.
Cleaning stubborn stains
More stubborn dirt can
(pure liquid soap; two t
and a cloth.
Do not let the water soa
seams.
Then wipe off with a so
Leather maintenance
The leather should be t
care product, available
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle 217
Safety Fir Technical Data
lt up until it is dry.
ts, it will not retract correctly into the automatic
ning agents on the seat belts, as this can ebbing. Ensure that belts do not come into .
ition at regular intervals. If you notice that the ctor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is eplaced by a specialist workshop.
a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts ified in any way.
ts to dry completely before rolling them up.
could become damaged.
altea_EN Seite 217 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Apply these products very sparingly.
Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
SEAT does everything possible to preserve the genuine qualities of this
natural product. Due to the natural properties of the specially selected hides
employed, the finished leather has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt, etc.
so a degree of care is required in everyday use and when looking after the
leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can scratch and damage the surface. If
the vehicle is under solar radiation for long periods, the leather should be
protected to prevent it from fading. However, slight colour variations in high-
quality natural leather are normal.
Caution Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar
products on leather.
To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a qualified
workshop.
Seat belts cleaning
A dirty belt may not work properly.
Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.
Seat belts cleaning
Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.
Clean the dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.
Allow it to dry.
Do not roll the seat be
If large stains form on the bel
belt retractor.
WARNING
Do not use chemical clea impair the strength of the w contact with corrosive fluids
Check all seat belts cond belt webbing, fittings, retra damaged, the belt must be r
Do not attempt to repair must not be removed or mod
Caution After cleaning, allow seat bel
Otherwise, the belt retractors
Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications218
r the CE mark (European Union manufacturer
phone holders or drink holders, should never thin the working range, of the airbags. Other-
ry if the airbag is triggered in an accident.
tions
ys be carried out according to our
the electronic components or software in the
ns. Due to the way the electronic components
s, other indirect systems may be affected by the
ir safety, lead to excessive wear of compo-
r vehicle registration documents.
es cannot be held liable for any damage
or work incorrectly performed.
d that all work should be performed by an
ng genuine SEAT approved parts and acces-
altea_EN Seite 218 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications
Accessories and spare parts
Always consult an Authorised Service Centre before
purchasing accessories and parts.
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety.
Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical
changes to your car, we recommend you consult your Authorised Service
Centre.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information
about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac-
turer regarding accessories and parts.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Approved Spare Parts. In this way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in
question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Authorised Service Centres have
the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and
professionally installed.
Despite continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess the
reliability, safety and suitability of those parts not approved by SEAT. For this
reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used,
even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are
covered by an official approval certificate.
Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the
vehicle and/or the way it is driven (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-
controlled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the
European Union's authorisation symbol).
If any additional electrical components are fitted so that they do not serve to
control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator
fan, etc.), then they must bea
conformity declaration).
WARNING
Accessories, for example tele be fitted on the covers, or wi wise, there is a danger of inju
Technical modifica
Modifications must alwa
specifications.
Unauthorised modifications to
vehicle may cause malfunctio
are linked together in network
faults. This can seriously impa
nents, and also invalidate you
SEAT Authorised Service Centr
caused by modifications and/
For this reason, we recommen
Authorised Service Centre usi
sories.
Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications 219
Safety Fir Technical Data
arily on driving. If you are distracted while cident.
ne mountings to the surfaces covering the ge of the airbags. There is a high risk of injury
instructions of your mobile telephone / two-way
altea_EN Seite 219 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
Incorrectly performed modifications or other kind of work on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and cause accidents.
Roof aerial*
The vehicle may be fitted with a foldable* and anti-theft* aerial that may be
positioned parallel to the roof.
To fold down
Unscrew the rod, position parallel to the roof and tighten once again.
To return to working position
Continue in the reverse order to the previous instruction.
Caution If an automatic car wash tunnel is used, before entering the tunnel, put the
aerial down parallel to the roof and do not tighten to avoid damage.
Mobile telephones and radiotelephones
First consult your Authorised Service Centre if you wish to use a mobile tele-
phone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of
10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibil-
ities for retrofitting this equipment.
Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a qualified
workshop, for example an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
Always concentrate prim driving you could have an ac
Never attach the telepho airbag units or within the ran if the airbag is triggered.
Note Please observe the operating
radio.
Checking and refilling levels220
, without unscrewing the cap, clockwise
se the flap until it clicks into place. The
h an anti-loss attachment
he vehicle on the right.
operated correctly, it will switch itself off as
er attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will
el may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.
vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the
otes on fuel can be found.
e and can cause serious burns and other inju-
y naked flame when filling the fuel tank of the nister, with fuel. This is an explosion hazard.
nts for the use of spare fuel canisters.
o not recommend carrying a spare fuel e canister could be damaged in an accident
ances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, points:
l canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- ld up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to explosive. Always place the canister on the
altea_EN Seite 220 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Checking and refilling levels
Refuelling
The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi-
mately 55 litres.
Unscrewing the tank cap
Lift the lid.
Grip the cap and then insert the key into the lock and rotate 180
to the left.
Unscrew the cap, turning it anti-clockwise.
Closing the tank cap
Screw the tank cap to the right, until the point of feeling a click.
Turn the key in the lock
through 180.
Remove the key and clo
tank cap is secured wit
The tank flap is at the rear of t
If the automatic filler nozzle is
soon as the tank is full. Nev
fill the expansion chamber. Fu
The correct fuel grade for your
fuel tank flap. Where further n
WARNING
Fuel is highly inflammabl ries.
Never smoke or use an vehicle, or a spare fuel ca
Follow legal requireme
For safety reasons we d canister in the vehicle. Th and leak.
If, in exceptional circumst please observe the following
Never fill the spare fue trostatic charge could bui ignite. This may be fatally ground to fill it.
Fig. 157 Tank flap open
Checking and refilling levels 221
Safety Fir Technical Data
oved from the paintwork immediately.
etely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause
t fuel could enter the catalytic converter and
nvironment fter the automatic filler nozzle has switched off;
erflow if it becomes warm.
g. 158 Fuel tank open with LPG filler neck and adapter.
altea_EN Seite 221 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possible.
If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electro- static charge building up.
Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.
Caution Fuel spills should be rem
Never run the tank compl
misfiring. As a result, unburn
cause damage.
For the sake of the e Do not try to put in more fuel a
this may cause the fuel to ov
LPG system*
Refuelling with LPG
The LPG filler neck is behind the fuel cap, next to the petrol filler neck.
WARNING (continued)
Fi
Checking and refilling levels222
spare wheel well has a capacity of 39 litres. If
very low, it may not be possible to completely
LPG pump, and the methods of use may vary.
tor fill the tank when refuelling for the first time
PG
ses may be heard. These noises are insignifi-
in the correct way could result in a fire, cause .
and inflammable substance. It may cause .
ore refuelling.
e phones and any other radiophony appli- ves may produce sparks and cause a fire.
cle while refuelling. If it is absolutely neces- se the door and touch a metal surface before in. This will prevent the generation of static ires while refuelling.
ay leak out after refuelling. If LPG comes into isk of freezing.
keep bare flames away from the tank during ay lead to an explosion.
altea_EN Seite 222 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Refuelling with LPG
Before refuelling, stop the engine and switch off the ignition.
Open the tank flap.
Before refuelling, please read the instructions on the pump.
Unscrew the cap of the gas filler neck .
Screw the required adapter on the gas filler neck .
Refuel as indicated in the instructions on the pump.
Unscrew the adapter .
Screw on the cap of the gas filler neck .
Close the tank flap.
When the hose is removed from the tank, a small amount of LPG may spill out
.
The LPG tank fig. 159 in the
the outside temperatures are
fill the LPG tank.
Pump attachments
There are a variety of types of
Therefore, let the pump opera
or fill from another pump.
Noises when refuelling with L
When refuelling with LPG, noi
cant.
WARNING
Failure to refuel or handle LPG an explosion or lead to injury
LPG is a highly explosive severe burns and other injury
Switch off the engine bef
Always disconnect mobil ances, as electromagnetic wa
Do not remain in the vehi sary to enter the vehicle, clo touching the attachment aga electricity and any possible f
Small quantities of LPG m contact with skin, there is a r
Do not smoke and always refuelling. Failure to do so m
Fig. 159 LPG tank in spare wheel well
A1
A2 A1
A2
A1
Checking and refilling levels 223
Safety Fir Technical Data
of adapter in Europe are the ACME adapter ,
, the bayonet adapter and the EURO adapter
end you carry all four adapters in your vehicle,
han one type of filling system. The introduction
le) throughout Europe is being studied.
fuel and is a blend of propane and butane.
the strict regulations concerning exhaust gas
r fossil fuels, LPG is characterised by its reduced
are regulated for all Europe in DIN EN 589 and
hout Europe.
n winter gas and summer gas. Winter gas has a
gas. As a result, the driving range of winter gas
ed consumption) than that of summer gas.
constantly increasing.
ay be found on Internet.
formed on this vehicle while running with LPG
of safety.
A1
A3
altea_EN Seite 223 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Adapter for the liquid petroleum gas (LPG) filler neck
An adapter is required due to the existence of a range of
pumps with different nozzles.
Fig. 160 General table of LPG filler neck adapters.
ACME adapter (adapter for Europe)
Dish Coupling Adapter (adapter for Italy)
Bayonet adapter
EURO adapter (adapter for Spain)
The supply includes the adapter for the country in question, the ACME , the
Dish Coupling , the bayonet or the EURO adapter .
The filler systems and corresponding adapters vary according to country. As
petrol stations abroad do not always have the necessary adapters for your
LPG system, we recommend you purchase the appropriate adapter before
travelling abroad. Check that the adapters are suited to your filling system.
Note The four most common types
the Dish Coupling adapter
. On the whole, we recomm
as some countries use more t
of a single system (Euronozz
LPG fuel
LPG is an alternative vehicle
The success of LPG is due to
emissions. Compared to othe
emissions.
LPG quality and consumption
Quality requirements for LPG
permit the use of LPG throug
A difference is drawn betwee
higher proportion of propane
may be lower (due to increas
LPG supplier network
The number of LPG pumps is
Lists of existing LPG pumps m
LPG safety
A series of collision tests per
have confirmed its high level
A1
A2
A3
A4
A1
A2 A3 A4
A2
A4
Checking and refilling levels224
ypes are listed on a sticker inside the
onding to the standard DIN EN 228, may be
c converters (EN = European Standard).
y the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON
r, unit for determining the knock resistance of
ith a higher octane number than the one recom-
ever, this has no advantage in terms of fuel
er.
r your vehicle is specified in your engine tech-
ection
may be mixed with small quantities of ethanol.
hanol fuels available at commercial establish-
5, which contain a high percentage of ethanol,
damage the fuel system.
fuel would permanently impair the efficiency
ll throttle can damage the engine when using
wer than the correct grade for the engine.
vironment l would seriously impair the efficiency of the
altea_EN Seite 224 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
The safety of the LPG system guarantees operation without risk. The following
safety measures have been adopted:
The LPG tank has a solenoid valve which closes automatically when the
engine is switched off (ignition off) or when running on petrol.
A solenoid type main valve disconnects the supply of gas to the engine
compartment when the engine is switched off or running on petrol.
A safety valve in the LPG tank with pipes to the outside prevents the gas
from entering the vehicle compartment.
All anchorage points and materials have been designed to ensure the
maximum possible levels of safety.
The condition of the LPG system should be checked regularly to guarantee
safe driving conditions . These checks are included in the Maintenance
Programme.
WARNING
If there is a smell of gas or a suspected leak, stop the vehicle immedi- ately and switch off the ignition. Open the doors to ventilate the vehicle. Do not carry on driving! Take the vehicle to a qualified workshop and have the fault repaired.
Immediately extinguish any cigarettes and remove from the vehicle any objects which might produce a spark or cause a fire, and switch off imme- diately if gas is smelt or a leak is detected.
LGP tanks are subject to pressure and must be checked regularly. The owner of the vehicle must check that these services are performed correctly.
When parking the vehicle in a closed area (for example in a garage), make sure that there is adequate ventilation, either natural or mechanical, to neutralise the LPG in the event of a leak.
Petrol
Petrol types
The recommended fuel t
fuel tank flap.
Only unleaded petrol, corresp used for vehicles with catalyti
Fuel types are differentiated b
= Regulation Octane Numbe
petrol). You may use petrol w
mended for your engine. How
consumption and engine pow
The appropriate type of fuel fo
nical table. Technical Data S
Caution Petrol that follows EN 228
However, the so-called bioet
ments with reference E50 or E8
may not be used, as they will
Even one tankful of leaded
of the catalytic converter.
High engine speed and fu
petrol with an octane rating lo
For the sake of the en Just one full tank of leaded fue
catalytic converter.
Checking and refilling levels 225
Safety Fir Technical Data
re can also be consulted to know if the vehicle
sel use.
l (biodiesel)
icle using biodiesel maybe somewhat reduced.
hicle using biodiesel may be slightly higher.
e cold down to approx. -10C.
0C, we recommend using winter diesel fuel.
o be refuelled with up to a maximum of 7%
nce with standard DIN 51628.
fuel system in vehicles which are not suitably
esel in your vehicle, please use only RME fuel
liant.
oes not meet the required standard, the fuel
peratures and a fuel biodiesel percentage of
in gas emission may occur during operation of
clogged when fuel is changed to biodiesel. For
ou that, when having run 300 or 400 km after a
ange must also be done. Also note the instruc-
aintenance plan.
parked for more than about two weeks, we
nk with biodiesel and driving about 50 km in
injection system.
altea_EN Seite 225 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Petrol additives
Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.
The quality of the petrol influences running behaviour, performance and
service life of the engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol
containing additives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the
fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.
If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems occur,
the required additives must be added during refuelling.
Diesel
Diesel*
Diesel fuel must correspond to DIN EN 590 (EN = European standard). It
must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indicates
the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.
Notes on filling with fuel page 220.
Biodiesel*
The biodiesel fuel must comply with the DIN EN 14.214 (FAME) Standard.
Biodiesel is a methyl ester obtained from rapeseed oil.
DIN is the German abbreviation for Deutsches Institut fr Normung e.V.,
the German standards institute.
EN means European Norm.
FAME is the English abbreviation for Fatty Acid Methyl Ester.
Your Authorised Service Cent
has been prepared for biodie
Things to note about RME fue
The performance of a veh
Fuel consumption of a ve
RME fuel is resistant to th
At temperatures below -1
Your vehicle is designed t
blended biodiesel in accorda
Caution RME fuel can damage the
adjusted.
If you decide to use biodi
which is DIN EN 14,214 comp
If you use biodiesel that d
filter could become clogged.
Note In case of low exterior tem
higher than 50%, an increase
the independent heating.
The fuel filter may become
this reason, we recommend y
fuel change, the fuel filter ch
tions in the Inspection and M
If the vehicle is to remain
recommend filling the fuel ta
order to avoid damage to the
Checking and refilling levels226
gine compartment
orking in the engine compartment
the engine compartment or on the
out cautiously.
n the engine or in the engine compart-
nd remove the key from the ignition.
eutral or the selector lever to position P.
ool down.
the vehicle.
ge 228.
the engine compartment unless you know
bs and have the correct tools! Have the work
shop if you are uncertain.
bles, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
y developed. SEAT provides a constant flow of
Service Centres concerning modifications. For
u to have service fluids and consumables
vice Centre. Please observe the relevant
engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a
altea_EN Seite 226 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Winter driving
Diesel can thicken in winter.
Winter-grade diesel
When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at
sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation.
Therefore, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in some countries during
the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22C.
In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold
has different temperature characteristics. Check with an Authorised Service
Centre or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel
fuels available.
Filter pre-heater
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter pre-heater, making it well equipped for
operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to
approx. -24C, provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15C.
However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start
at temperatures of under -24C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for
a while.
Caution Do not mix fuel additives (thinners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.
Working in the en
Safety instructions on w
Any work carried out in
engine must be carried
Before starting any work o
ment:
1. Switch off the engine a
2. Apply the handbrake.
3. Move the gear stick to n
4. Wait for the engine to c
5. Keep children away from
6. Raise the bonnet pa
You should not do any work in
exactly how to carry out the jo
carried out by a qualified work
All service fluids and consuma
batteries, are being constantl
information to the Authorised
this reason, we recommend yo
replaced by an Authorised Ser
instructions page 218. The
hazardous area .
Checking and refilling levels 227
Safety Fir Technical Data
formed when the engine is started or with the dditional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and
on system. You should also observe the
ical wiring of the ignition system.
loose clothing and long hair do not get e parts. Danger of death. Before starting any
ie back and cover hair, and wear tight-fitting
about pressing the accelerator if a gear is omatic or manual gearbox. The vehicle could rake is applied. Danger of death.
out on the fuel system or on electrical compo- following safety notes in addition to the above
e battery. The vehicle must be unlocked when he alarm will be triggered.
d flames.
inguisher on hand.
service fluids, make absolutely certain that you
eservoirs. Failure to observe this point will result
ngine damage!
altea_EN Seite 227 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
All work on the engine or in the engine compartment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, involves the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or fire.
Never open the bonnet if you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to cool before carefully opening the bonnet.
Switch off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
Apply the handbrake and move the gear stick to neutral or selector lever to position P.
Keep children away from the vehicle.
Never touch hot engine parts. There is a risk of burns.
Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.
Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system, particularly at the points where the jump leads are attached page 276. The battery could explode.
Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature controlled and could start automatically, even when the engine has been switched off and the key removed from the ignition!
Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the coolant is hot, the cooling system will be pressurised!
Protect face, hands and arms by covering the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect against escaping coolant and steam.
Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment.
If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for securing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.
If any work has to be per engine running, there is an a rotating parts, such as the d from the high-voltage igniti following points:
Never touch the electr
Ensure that jewellery, trapped in rotating engin work remove jewellery, t clothes.
Always think carefully engaged in either an aut move, even if the handb
If work has to be carried nents, you must observe the warnings:
Always disconnect th this is done, otherwise t
Do not smoke.
Never work near nake
Always have a fire ext
Caution When changing or topping up
fill the fluids into the correct r
in serious malfunctions and e
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels228
ensure that the windscreen wipers are in
pull the lever under the dashboard
ion indicated (arrow). The bonnet will be
tion .
e release lever (arrow) and open the
and secure it in fixture designed for this
you see steam, smoke or coolant escaping t.
Fig. 162 Arrester hook for bonnet.
altea_EN Seite 228 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you
should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. If you
find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a qualified
workshop.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.
Before opening the bonnet
rest position.
To release the bonnet,
fig. 161 in the direct
released by a spring ac
Lift the bonnet using th
bonnet.
Release the bonnet stay
in the bonnet.
WARNING
Hot coolant can scald!
Never open the bonnet if from the engine compartmen
Fig. 161 Detail of foot- well area on driver's side: lever for unlocking the bonnet.
Checking and refilling levels 229
Safety Fir Technical Data
s
st conform with exact specifications.
cial, high quality, multi grade oil that can be
r except for those regions affected by extreme
is necessary for the correct operation and long
en it becomes necessary to replenish or change
complies to the VW standards.
conforming to the VW standards then oil
I standards with an appropriate viscosity at
uld be used instead. The use of this type of oil
s on the performance of the engine for example,
consumption and a higher emission level.
fferent oils may be mixed as long as they all
.
ards) set out in the following page should
e service oil; the container will display together
trol and diesel engines, the oil can be used for
altea_EN Seite 229 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully open the bonnet.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 226.
Closing the bonnet
Raise the bonnet slightly.
Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.
At a height of about 30 cm let it fall so it is locked.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it once more and
let it fall as before.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could open while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. Risk of accident.
After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.
If you notice that the bonnet latch is not secured when the vehicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet properly. Risk of accident.
Engine oil
Engine oil specification
The engine oil used mu
Specifications
The engine comes with a spe
used in all seasons of the yea
cold.
As the use of good quality oil
service life of the engine, wh
the oil, always use an oil that
If it is not possible to find oil
conforming to the ACEA or AP
atmospheric temperature sho
may have some repercussion
long starting time, increased
If a top up is required then di
conform to the VW standards
The specifications (VW stand
appear on the container of th
the different standards for pe
both types of engines.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels230
climate that is constantly very cold or very
mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration
ot covered by the warranty.
end finding an engine oil that conforms to the
ns and keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
e available for a top-up if needed.
level
ndicates the level of the oil.
Fig. 164 Engine oil dipstick.
altea_EN Seite 230 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Oil properties
Viscosity
The viscosity class of the oil is selected according to the diagram.
When the ambient temperature falls outside the limits of the scale for a short
period, an oil change is not required.
Mono-grade oil
Single grade oils are generally not suitable for all year round use, due to
ranges of viscosity22).
These oils are only useful in a
warm.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be
caused by these additives is n
Note Before a long trip, we recomm
corresponding VW specificatio
correct engine oil will always b
Checking the engine oil
The engine oil dipstick i
Engine type Specification
Petrol VW 501 01/ VW 502 00/ VW 504 00
Diesel VW 505 01/ VW 507 00/ VW 506 01
Diesel Engines with Particulate filter
(DPF)a)
a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.
VW 507 00
Fig. 163 Types of oil according to temperature
22) Viscosity: oil density
Checking and refilling levels 231
Safety Fir Technical Data
ea do not start the engine. This could result
catalytic converter. Contact an Authorised
mall quantities of oil.
t, read and observe the warnings in
rking in the engine compartment on
iller opening fig. 165.
ounts, using the correct oil.
AA
Fig. 165 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap
altea_EN Seite 231 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Checking oil level
Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the service temperature
is reached then stop.
Wait two minutes.
Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and
insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.
Then pull it out once more and check the oil level page 230,
fig. 164. Top up with engine oil if necessary.
Oil level in area
Do not add oil.
Oil level in area
Oil can be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after zone .
Oil level in area
Oil must be topped up. The indicated oil level should be after in zone .
Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the car is used, oil
consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1,000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be
higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be
checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a
journey.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 226.
Caution If the oil level is above the ar
in damage to the engine and
Service Centre.
Topping up engine oil
Top up gradually with s
Before opening the bonne
Safety instructions on wo
page 226.
Unscrew cap from oil f
Top-up oil in small am
AA
AB
AA
AC
AA
Checking and refilling levels232
hanged at the intervals given in the
the engine oil changed by an Authorised
own in the Maintenance Programme.
f you have the specialist knowledge required!
t, read and observe the warnings ions on working in the engine compartment.
l down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries.
oid injuries caused by splashes of oil.
ain plug with your fingers, keep your arm hori- m running down your arm.
ly if it comes into contact with engine oil.
sed oil must be stored in a safe place out of s disposed of.
ith engine oil. This could result in engine
by the use of such additives would not be
ty.
vironment roblems, the necessary special tools and
, we recommend that you have the engine oil
orised Service Centre.
altea_EN Seite 232 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
To avoid over-filling with engine oil, you should top-up using
small quantities, wait a while and check the oil level before
adding any more oil.
As soon as the oil level is in area , carefully close the cap.
The position of the oil filler opening is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram page 285.
Engine oil specification page 229.
WARNING
Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine components when topping up.
Caution If the oil level is above the area do not start the engine. This could result
in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a qualified work-
shop.
For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area . Otherwise oil can be drawn in
through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the
exhaust system.
Changing engine oil
The engine oil must be c
service schedule.
We recommend that you have
Service Centre.
The oil change intervals are sh
WARNING
Only change the oil yourself i
Before opening the bonne page 226, Safety instruct
Wait for the engine to coo
Wear eye protection to av
When removing the oil dr zontal to help prevent oil fro
Wash your skin thorough
Engine oil is poisonous! U the reach of children until it i
Caution No additives should be used w
damage. Any damage caused
covered by the factory warran
For the sake of the en Because of the disposal p
specialist knowledge required
and filter changed by an Auth
AB
AA
AA
Checking and refilling levels 233
Safety Fir Technical Data
+ must be added in sufficient quantities to n at the coldest ambient temperatures that ly cold ambient temperatures, the coolant hicle to breakdown. As the heater would also ere is a risk of suffering exposure!
considerably inferior corrosion protection. The
ling system can lead to a loss of coolant,
e engine.
+ (purple) can be mixed with the additive G12
(red colour) with G11.
altea_EN Seite 233 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Never pour oil down drains or into the ground.
Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It has to be large
enough to hold all the engine oil
Coolant
Coolant specifications
Coolant is a mixture of water and at least 40% coolant addi-
tive.
The cooling system must be filled with a mixture of water and at least 40 % of
our coolant additive G12+ or an additive with the specification TT-VW 774 F (it
is dyed purple). This mixture gives the necessary frost protection down to -
25C and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It
also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant.
The concentration of coolant must always be at least 40% - even if frost
protection is not required.
If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of
the antifreeze additive G12+ can be increased. However, the percentage of
coolant additives should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost
protection. It would also reduce the cooling effect. A mixture with 60%
coolant additive will give frost protection to approx. -40C.
WARNING
The coolant additive is toxic. There is a toxic risk. Always keep the coolant additive in the original container which should be stored out of the reach of children. The same applies to coolant which you have drained off.
The coolant additive G12 provide anti-freeze protectio can be expected. At extreme could freeze, causing the ve not work in this situation, th
Caution Other additives may give
resulting corrosion in the coo
causing serious damage to th
The coolant additive G12
(red) or G11. Never mix G12
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels234
th the MIN mark, top up with coolant.
AX mark.
sion tank
tightly.
ansion reservoir is shown in the corresponding
page 285.
ets the required specifications page 233.
additive if coolant additive G12+ is not avail-
er and bring the coolant concentration back up
possible by putting in the specified additive
nt.
rk. Otherwise the excess coolant will be forced
n the engine is hot.
ed purple) may be mixed with G12 (dyed red)
ngine compartment or on the engine must be
ine compartment, always observe the safety
altea_EN Seite 234 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Checking the coolant level and topping up
The correct coolant level is important for fault-free func-
tioning of the engine cooling system.
Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings in
Safety instructions on working in the engine compartment on
page 226.
Opening the coolant expansion tank
Switch off the engine and allow it to cool.
To prevent scalding, cover the cap on the expansion tank with a
thick cloth and carefully unscrew the cap .
Checking coolant level
Look into the open coolant expansion tank and read off the
coolant level.
If the level is undernea
Topping up coolant
Only use new coolant.
Do not fill above the M
Closing the coolant expan
Screw the cap on again
The position of the coolant exp
engine compartment diagram
Make sure that the coolant me
Do not use a different type of
able. In this case use only wat
to the correct level as soon as
page 233.
Always top up with new coola
Do not fill above the MAX ma
out of the cooling system whe
The coolant additive G12+ (dy
and also with G 11.
WARNING
Any work carried out in the e carried out cautiously.
When working in the eng warnings page 226.
Fig. 166 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap
Checking and refilling levels 235
Safety Fir Technical Data
windscreen wiper blades
d
the windscreen should always be
.
he headlight washing system are supplied with
sher fluid container in the engine compartment.
e right-hand side of the engine compartment.
lean the windscreen and headlights. We recom-
product to the windscreen washer fluid.
g products exist on the market with high deter-
es, these may be added all-year-round. Please
s on the packaging.
Fig. 167 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir.
altea_EN Seite 235 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised! Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. This is a burn injury risk.
Caution When mixed with other additives the colour of G12 will change to brown.
If this occurs you should have the coolant changed immediately. Failure to do
so will result in engine damage!
If a lot of coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before
putting in cold coolant. This avoids damaging the engine. Large coolant
losses are an indication of leaks in the cooling system. See a specialised
workshop immediately and have the cooling system checked. Otherwise,
there is a risk of engine damage.
Washer fluid and
Topping up washer flui
The water for cleaning
mixed with washer fluid
The windscreen washer and t
fluid from the windscreen wa
The reservoir is located on th
Plain water is not enough to c
mend that you always add a
Approved windscreen cleanin
gent and anti-freeze properti
follow the dilution instruction
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels236
iper blades
blades are in perfect condition, you
roved visibility. Damaged wiper
ed immediately.
Fig. 168 Windscreen wipers in the service posi- tion
Fig. 169 Changing the front wiper blades
altea_EN Seite 236 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
WARNING
Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously.
When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 226.
Caution Never put radiator anti-freeze or other additives into the windscreen
washer fluid.
Always use approved windscreen cleansing products diluted as per
instructions. If you use other washer fluids or soap solutions, the tiny holes
in the fan-shaped nozzles could become blocked.
Changing windscreen w
If the windscreen wiper
will benefit from an imp
blades should be replac
Checking and refilling levels 237
Safety Fir Technical Data
per blades and all windows regularly.
be changed once or twice a year.
reen wipers could scratch the windscreen.
h remover, paint thinner or similar products to
d damage the windscreen wiper blades.
n wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This
n wipers forward unless they are in the service
et could be damaged.
ved to the service position only when the
altea_EN Seite 237 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
To change the blades it is necessary to change the rest position of
the wipers to the service position.
Service position (For changing wiper blades)
Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
Turn ignition on and off and then (before approx. 8 seconds have
elapsed), move the windscreen wiper lever to the intermittent
wipe position. The windscreen wipers will move to the service
position.
Changing the windscreen wiper blades
Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.
Push the side buttons, free the blade and pull in the direction of
the arrow fig. 169.
Fitting the wiper blade
Insert a blade of identical length and design into the wiper arm.
Slide the blade until it clicks into position.
Push the wiper arms back against the windscreen.
If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are damaged,
or cleaned if they are soiled.
If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind-
screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a qualified
workshop and corrected if necessary.
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!
Clean the windscreen wi
The wiper blades should
Caution Damaged or dirty windsc
Never use fuel, nail varnis
clean the windows. This coul
Never move the windscree
could cause damage.
Do not pull the windscree
position. Otherwise the bonn
Note The wiper arms can be mo
bonnet is properly closed.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels238
from the glass page 238, fig. 170.
in the direction of the arrow and remove
fig. 170.
e top end of the wiper arm.
n in the page 238, fig. 171 and slide
it fits into place.
er blade regularly. Change as required.
s, it should be replaced if damaged, or cleaned
a qualified workshop.
good visibility through all windows!
er blades and all windows regularly.
be changed once or twice a year.
wiper could scratch the rear window.
h remover, paint thinner or similar products to
n wiper by hand. This could cause damage.
altea_EN Seite 238 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Changing the rear wiper blade
A good rear wiper blade is essential for clear rear vision.
Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm away
Slide the blade adapter
the blade page 238,
Fitting the wiper blade
With one hand, hold th
Place the blade as show
the adapter along until
Check the condition of the wip
If the windscreen wiper scrape if soiled.
If this is not sufficient, refer to
WARNING
Do not drive unless you have
Clean the windscreen wip
The wiper blades should
Caution A damaged or dirty window
Never use fuel, nail varnis
clean the window.
Never move the windscree
Fig. 170 Remove rear window wiper blade
Fig. 171 Mount rear window wiper blade
Checking and refilling levels 239
Safety Fir Technical Data
n noticeably in a short time, or drops below the
eak in the brake system. A display on the instru-
e brake fluid level is too low page 77.
o check the brake fluid level, read and observe
id
am indicates the brake fluid change
the brake fluid changed by an Authorised
lease read and follow the warnings in
ng in the engine compartment on page 226 in
artment.
. In the course of time, it will absorb water from
ontent in the brake fluid is too high, the brake
so considerably reduces the boiling point of the
brakes may then cause a vapour lock which
ct.
nly brake fluid compliant with the US standard
mend the use of Genuine SEAT brake fluid.
d brake fluid impairs the braking effect.
altea_EN Seite 239 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Brake fluid
Checking the brake fluid level
The brake fluid is checked at the intervals given in the service
schedule.
Read off the fluid level at the transparent brake fluid reservoir. It
should always be between the MIN and MAX marks.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is shown in the corresponding engine
compartment diagram page 285. The brake fluid reservoir has a black and
yellow cap.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used as the
brake pads are automatically adjusted as they wear.
However, if the level goes dow
MIN mark, there may be a l
ment panel will warn you if th
WARNING
Before opening the bonnet t the warnings page 226.
Changing the brake flu
The Maintenance Progr
intervals.
We recommend that you have
Service Centre.
Before opening the bonnet, p
Safety instructions on worki
Working in the engine comp
Brake fluid absorbs moisture
the ambient air. If the water c
system could corrode. This al
brake fluid. Heavy use of the
could impair the braking effe
It is important that you use o
FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recom
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Ol
Fig. 172 In the engine compartment: Brake fluid reservoir cover
Checking and refilling levels240
he battery
er of injury and chemical burns as well as the orking on the battery and the electrical
ect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and
sive and caustic. Wear protective gloves and batteries. This could spill acid through the eyes immediately for several minutes with
al care immediately. Neutralize any acid ing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with llowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi-
s and smoking are prohibited. When handling ent, avoid causing sparks and electrostatic
rotection
d is very corrosive and caustic. Wear protec-
and eye protection!
ks, naked lights and smoking are prohibited!
plosive mixture of gases is released when the
nder charge.
ren away from acid and batteries!
altea_EN Seite 240 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings page 226.
Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. There is a toxic risk.
Complete the brake fluid change according to the Maintenance Program. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.
Caution Brake fluid could damage the paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the
paintwork immediately.
For the sake of the environment Brake fluid must be drained and disposed of in the proper manner observing
environmental regulations.
Battery
Warnings on handling t
WARNING
Always be aware of the dang risk of accident or fire when w system:
Wear eye protection. Prot particles containing lead.
Battery acid is very corro eye protection. Do not tilt the vents. Rinse battery acid from clear water. Then seek medic splashes on the skin or cloth plenty of water. If acid is swa ately.
Fires, sparks, naked light cables and electrical equipm
WARNING (continued)
Wear eye p
Battery aci
tive gloves
Fires, spar
A highly ex
battery is u
Keep child
Checking and refilling levels 241
Safety Fir Technical Data
ing in cold conditions for a long period, protect
eezes it will be damaged.
te level
ould be checked regularly in high-
t countries and in older batteries.
pen the battery cover at the front in
working in the engine compartment on
arnings on handling the battery on
ay in the "magic eye" on the top of the
in the window, tap the window gently until
shown in the corresponding engine compart-
cated on the top of the battery changes colour,
te and electrolyte level of the battery.
rs:
us.
the battery must be replaced. Contact a
altea_EN Seite 241 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury.
A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.
Keep children away from acid and batteries.
Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the engine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.
Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle electrical system, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.
Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never reverse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.
Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0
Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.
Never use a defective battery. This may be fatally explosive. Replace a damaged battery immediately.
Caution Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the engine
is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic compo-
nents.
Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as
the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.
If the vehicle is left stand
the battery from frost. If it fr
Checking the electroly
The electrolyte level sh
mileage vehicles, in ho
Open the bonnet and o
Safety instructions on
page 226 in W
page 240.
Check the colour displ
battery.
If there are air bubbles
they disperse.
The position of the battery is
ment diagram page 285.
The magic eye indicator, lo
depending on the charge sta
There are two different colou
Black: correct charge stat
Transparent/clear yellow:
specialist workshop.
WARNING (continued)
Checking and refilling levels242
vironment nces such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
tely and must not be disposed of with ordinary
altea_EN Seite 242 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Charging and changing the vehicle battery
The battery is maintenance-free and is checked during the
inspection service. All work on the vehicle battery requires
specialist knowledge.
If you often drive short distances or if the vehicle is not driven for long
periods, the battery should be checked by a qualified workshop between the
scheduled services.
If the battery has discharged and you have problems starting the vehicle, the
battery might be damaged. If this happens, we recommend you have the
vehicle battery checked by an Authorised Service Centre where it will be re-
charged or replaced.
Charging the battery
The vehicle battery should be charged by a qualified workshop only, as
batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be
charged in a controlled environment.
Replacing a vehicle battery
The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has
special safety features.
Genuine SEAT batteries fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety spec-
ifications of your vehicle.
WARNING
We recommend you use only maintenance-free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which comply with the standards T 825 06 and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of 2001.
Before starting any work on the batteries, you must read and observe the warnings in Warnings on handling the battery on page 240.
For the sake of the en Batteries contain toxic substa
must be disposed of appropria
household waste.
Wheels and tyres 243
Safety Fir Technical Data
ften not readily visible. If you notice unusual
one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres
be checked immediately by an Authorised
attern
indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with
erve the direction of rotation indicated when
tees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-
wear.
aximum grip in the first 500 km. Drive particu- f accident.
d tyres. This may cause an accident.
ration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when ediately and check the tyres for damage.
e can be seen on the sticker on the
inflation pressure from the sticker. The
r tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2
on the sticker.
altea_EN Seite 243 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Wheels and tyres
Wheels
General notes
Avoiding damage
If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very
slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.
Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.
Storing tyres
Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of
rotation. This ensures you will be able to install them correctly
when you replace them.
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a
cool, dry and preferably dark location.
Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel
rims.
New tyres
New tyres have to be run in page 200.
The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre
and the tread pattern.
Concealed damage
Damage to tyres and rims is o
vibrations or the car pulling to
is damaged. The tyres should
Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread p
An arrow on the tyre sidewall
directional tread. Always obs
fitting the wheel. This guaran
planing, excessive noise and
WARNING
New tyres do not have m larly carefully to avoid risk o
Never drive with damage
If you notice unusual vib driving, stop the vehicle imm
Checking tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressur
inside of the tank flap.
1. Read the required tyre
values refer to Summe
bar to the values given
Wheels and tyres244
g
oring system constantly checks the
nsors of the ABS wheels. It operates by
ency spectrum of each wheel.
e genuine SEAT tyres. In addition, check and
.
re changed or one or more tyres are changed,
pressing the SET switch on the central console.
the event of a loss of pressure by means of
instrument cluster display. The system uses
epends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure
ch 10C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre
eing driven and the tyre pressure will rise
ou should only adjust the tyre pressures when
ly at ambient temperature).
e monitoring system works reliably, you should
t the tyre pressures at regular intervals and
ference values) in the system.
el is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.
e when the tyres are hot. This may damage or accident!
tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre tyre may burst. Risk of accident!
altea_EN Seite 244 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are
cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be
reduced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.
Tyre pressure
The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pressure
should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a
journey.
The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the
tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. The slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced .
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking tyre pressure value is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.
A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!
At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.
Tyre pressure monitorin
The tyre pressure monit
pressure of the tyres.
The system uses the speed se
analysing the speed and frequ
For optimum performance, us
adjust tyre pressures regularly
Whenever the tyre pressures a
the system should be Reset by
The system warns the driver in
symbols and messages in the
ESP page 195.
Note that tyre pressure also d
increases about 0.1 bar for ea
heats up while the vehicle is b
accordingly. For this reason, y
they are cold (i.e. approximate
To ensure that the tyre pressur
check and, if necessary, adjus
store the correct pressures (re
A tyre pressure information lab
WARNING
Never adjust tyre pressur even burst the tyres. Risk of
An insufficiently inflated causes significant heating of bead may be released or the
Wheels and tyres 245
Safety Fir Technical Data
s dependent on tyre pressure, driving
Fig. 173 Tyre tread wear indicators
Fig. 174 Diagram for changing wheels
altea_EN Seite 245 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.
Significant tyre pressure loss
The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure for a least
one tyre is insufficient.
Stop the vehicle.
Switch the engine off.
Check the tyre(s).
Change the wheel if necessary.
Tyre service life
The service life of tyres i
style and fitting.
Wheels and tyres246
ccidents if a tyre bursts during driving!
d at the latest when the tread is worn down to lure to do so could result in an accident. Worn speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater
eds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes eat. This can cause tread separation and tyre lways observe the recommended tyre pres-
ar, you should have the running gear checked tre.
il, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.
s must be replaced immediately!
vironment se fuel consumption.
you to continue driving even with a
ajority of cases.
ti-puncture23) tyres from the factory indi-
re on the instrument panel.
ountry.
altea_EN Seite 246 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Wear indicators
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators
page 245, fig. 173, running across the tread. Depending on the make,
there will be six to eight of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on
the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the
positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by
law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indica-
tors). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export
countries .
Tyre pressure
Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.
For this reason, the tyre pressure should be checked at least once per month
page 243.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.
Changing wheels around
If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable
to change them around as shown page 245, fig. 174. All the tyres will then
last for about the same time.
Wheel balance
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun-
tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results
in steering vibration.
Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive
wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced
when a new tyre is fitted.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of
the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel align-
ment checked by an Authorised Service Centre.
WARNING
There is a serious danger of a
The tyres must be replace the tread wear indicators. Fai tyres do not grip well at high risk of aquaplaning
At continuously high spe more. This causes it to overh blow-out. Risk of accident. A sures.
If tyres show excessive we by an Authorised Service Cen
Keep chemicals such as o
Damaged wheels and tyre
For the sake of the en Under-inflated tyres will increa
Anti-puncture tyres
Anti-puncture tyres allow
punctured tyre, in the m
Vehicles equipped with an
cate the loss of tyre pressu
23) Depending upon version and c
Wheels and tyres 247
Safety Fir Technical Data
e of the tyres,
,
to continue driving even using anti-puncture
n severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre
re is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown
fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.
driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel
off smoke.
conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is
speed of 80 km/h is subject to road and observe legal requirements when doing so.
pid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usual.
cles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
ng driven in emergency conditions, the driving aired and there is a risk of accident.
not deflate on losing pressure because they
ed sides. Therefore defects in the tyre can not be
tion.
used on front tyres used in emergency
altea_EN Seite 247 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Driving with anti-puncture tyres (emergency gear)
Leave the ESP/TCS (electronic stabilisation programme)
switched on, or switch on page 194.
Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h maximum).
Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.
Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.
Look out for the ESP/TCS intervening often, smoke coming from
the tyres or the smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrating or a clat-
tering noise. If any of these occur, stop the vehicle.
The anti-puncture tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description:
DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.
The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are
supported on the sides (emergency driving).
The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can
then drive a maximum of 80 km and if the circumstances are favourable (for
example, low load), even more.
The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be
checked in a specialist workshop to detect possible damage and replace it if
necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one
tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance
which can be travelled.
Starting driving in emergency conditions
When the loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this
implies that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions .
End of emergency operation
Do not drive on if:
smoke is coming from on
there is a smell of rubber
the vehicle vibrates,
there is a rattling noise.
When is it no longer possible tyres?
If one of the tyres has bee
has been badly damaged the
off and cause damage to the
It is also advisable to stop
starts overheating and gives
WARNING
When driving in emergency considerably impaired.
The maximum permitted weather conditions. Please
Avoid sharp turns and ra
Avoid driving over obsta
If one or more tyres is bei quality of the vehicle is imp
Note The anti-puncture tyres do
are supported on the reinforc
detected with a visual inspec
Snow chains must not be
conditions.
Wheels and tyres248
as well as the proper facilities for disposing of
has full information on the technical require-
ging tyres, wheels or wheel trims.
se only wheels and tyres which have been odel. Failure to do so could impair vehicle
on tyres that are more than six years old. If should drive slowly and with extra care at all
se with an unknown history of use.
ed, you must ensure that the flow of air to the could cause them to overheat.
tted with radial tyres of the same type, size e same tread pattern.
vironment according to the laws in the country concerned.
not generally possible to use the wheels from
pply to wheels of the same model. The use of
t been approved by SEAT for use with your
icle's type approval for use on public roads.
same as the tyres that are mounted on the
er tyres - you should only use the spare tyre for
e with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel
altea_EN Seite 248 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
New tyres and wheels
New tyres and wheels have to be run-in.
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The
tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe
handling .
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front
tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations
marked on the sidewall, for example:
195/65 R15 91T
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
65 Height/width ratio in %
R Tyre construction: Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
91 Load rating code
T Speed rating
The tyres could also have the following information:
A direction of rotation symbol
Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.
The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only
on the inner side of the wheel).
DOT... 1103... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th
week of 2003.
We recommend that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by an Authorised
Service Centre. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary
special tools and spare parts
the old tyres.
Any Authorised Service Centre
ments when installing or chan
WARNING
We recommend that you u approved by SEAT for your m handling. Risk of accident.
Avoid running the vehicle you have no alternative, you times.
Never use old tyres or tho
If wheel trims are retrofitt brakes is not restricted. This
All four wheels must be fi (rolling circumference) and th
For the sake of the en Old tyres must be disposed of
Note For technical reasons, it is
other vehicles. This can also a
wheels or tyres which have no
model may invalidate the veh
If the spare tyre is not the
vehicle - for example with wint
a short period of time and driv
as soon as possible.
Wheels and tyres 249
Safety Fir Technical Data
e the vehicles handling on snow and
res will considerably improve the vehicles
mer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
and snow.
to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pressures
ee sticker on tank flap).
all four wheels.
ter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's regis-
radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the
pply to winter tyres.
veness when the tread is worn down to a depth
e 248, New tyres and wheels determines the
ter tyres:
hich can exceed the speed rating of the fitted
e sticker in the driver's field of view. These
ur Authorised Service Centre. The legal require-
e followed.
d for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with
hen the roads are free of snow and ice.
refer to the notes on the spare wheel
wheels.
altea_EN Seite 249 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt
heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system functions correctly.
In certain circumstances, you may not use wheel bolts from a different car -
even if it is the same model page 218.
After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tight-
ening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
WARNING
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.
The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.
Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.
If the torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.
Caution The prescribed torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.
Winter tyres
Winter tyres will improv
ice.
In winter conditions winter ty
handling. The design of sum
pattern) gives less grip on ice
Winter tyres must be inflated
specified for summer tyres (s
Winter tyres must be fitted on
Information on permitted win tration documents. Use only
vehicle documentation also a
Winter tyres lose their effecti
of 4 mm.
The speed rating code pag
following speed limits for win
Q max. 160 km/h
S max. 180 km/h
T max. 190 km/h
H max. 210 km/h
In some countries, vehicles w
tyre must have an appropriat
stickers are available from yo
ments of each country must b
Do not have winter tyres fitte
summer tyres handle better w
If you have a flat tyre, please
page 248, New tyres and
Wheels and tyres250
ed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h. The
ntry should be followed.
k your Approved Service Centre for information
and snow chain size.
altea_EN Seite 250 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
WARNING
The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to tyre damage and thus, an accident risk.
For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres in good time. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.
Snow chains
Snow chains are only permitted on the front wheels and only for tyres
195/65R15 and 205/55R16. These tyres may only be fitted with fine-pitch
link chains which do not protrude more than 15 mm page 284.
Snow chains must have fine-pitch links which do not protrude more than 9
mm, including tension device.
Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety
reasons cover caps, available in any Authorised Service Centre, must then be
fitted over the wheel bolts.
WARNING
Snow chains should be correctly tightened in accordance with the manu- facturer's instructions. This will prevent the chains coming into contact with the wheel housing.
Caution You must remove the snow chains to drive on roads which are free of snow.
Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very
quickly.
Note In some countries, the spe
legal requirements of the cou
We recommend that you as
about appropriate wheel, tyre
If and when 251
Safety Fir Technical Data
factory is only designed for changing wheels t attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles .
m, level ground.
hen the vehicle is on the jack. Risk of accident.
t underneath the vehicle, this must be secured se, there is a risk of injury.
altea_EN Seite 251 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
If and when
Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel
Vehicle Tools
The vehicle onboard tools are located under the floor panel in
the luggage compartment.
Lift the cover of the luggage compartment, by pulling it up with a
finger in the fitting.
Take the onboard tools out of the vehicle.
The tool kit includes:
Jack*
Hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps*
Box spanner for wheel bolts*
Reversible screwdriver with handle (including hexagonal interior) for the
wheel bolts. The screwdriver is a combination tool.
Towing eye
Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
Some of the items listed are only provided in certain models / model years,
or are optional extras.
WARNING
Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to tighten the wheel bolts as with this it is not possible to tighten the bolts to the required torque. Risk of accident.
The jack supplied by the on this model. On no accoun or other loads. Risk of injury
Use the jack only on a fir
Never start the engine w
If work is to be carried ou by suitable stands. Otherwi
WARNING (continued)
If and when252
ains must not be used on the compact tempo-
on one of the front wheels when using snow
rary spare in place of one of the rear wheels.
hains to the wheel taken from the rear and use
tured front wheel.
e checked and corrected as soon as possible. for dimensions 125/70R16 125/70R18 ther tyre dimensions please refer to the label
so could result in an accident.
0 km/h. Higher speeds can cause an accident.
, hard braking and fast cornering. Risk of acci-
mpact spare tyres at the same time, risk of
mal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on wheel rim.
hicles not including a spare wheel) is
anel in the luggage compartment.
the Tyre Mobility System Tyre repair kit.
container with sealing compound to repair the
generate the required tyre pressure. The kit will
altea_EN Seite 252 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Compact temporary spare wheel* (emergency wheel)
The compact spare wheel (emergency wheel for vehicles
without the anti-puncture kit) should only be used when
strictly necessary.
The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage
compartment and is attached by a thumbnut.
How to use the compact temporary spare wheel
Should you ever have a punctured tyre, the compact temporary spare wheel
is only intended for temporary use until you can reach a workshop. The
standard-size road wheel should be replaced as soon as possible.
Please note the following restrictions when using the compact temporary
spare wheel. This spare wheel has been specially designed for your vehicle,
thus, it cannot be changed with the spare wheel from another vehicle.
No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the
compact temporary spare wheel rim.
Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow ch
rary spare wheel.
If you should have a puncture
chains, fit the compact tempo
You can then attach the snow c
this wheel to replace the punc
WARNING
The tyre pressures must b The emergency tyre pressure 135/90R16 is 4.2 bar; for all o on the fuel cap. Failure to do
Do not drive faster than 8
Avoid heavy acceleration dent.
Never use two or more co accident.
No other type of tyre (nor the compact temporary spare
Tyre repair kit*
The tyre repair kit (for ve
stored under the floor p
Your vehicle is equipped with
The tyre repair kit consists of a
puncture and a compressor to
Fig. 175 Luggage compartment. Access to the spare wheel
If and when 253
Safety Fir Technical Data
s on and place the warning triangle in position. nd also warns other road users.
on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the
ing a stone or similar object under it to prevent
.
ents when doing so.
ribed below
er. Also refer to page 254, fig. 176.
ts.
jack in the corresponding zone.
then put on the spare wheel.
s firmly with the box spanner.
altea_EN Seite 253 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
reliably seal punctures up to a size of about 4 mm caused by the penetration
of a foreign body into the tyre.
Note Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Wheel change
Preparation work
What you must do before changing a wheel.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as
level as possible.
All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
Switch off the engine. Switch on the hazard warning lights.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage the first gear, or put the selector lever to position P for
those vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from your vehicle.
Take the vehicle tools and the spare wheel out of the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning light This is for your own safety a
Caution If you have to change the tyre
wheel being changed by plac
the vehicle from rolling away
Note Please observe legal requirem
Changing a wheel
Change the wheel as desc
Remove the wheel cov
Slacken the wheel bol
Raise the car with the
Remove the wheel and
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the wheel bolt
Replace the hub cap.
If and when254
removed to gain access to the wheel
ok from the tools into the designated
he bolt hole covers of the wheel cover
Fig. 176 Changing the wheel: Removing a hub cap
altea_EN Seite 254 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
After changing a wheel
After changing the wheel there are still tasks to complete.
Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.
Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the luggage compart-
ment and secure it.
Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted tyre as soon as
possible.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as
possible with a torque wrench. The prescribed torque must be
120 Nm.
Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn when
changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the wheel bolt torque
checked.
For your safety, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt torque has
been checked.
Wheel trims
The wheel trims must be
bolts.
Removing
Insert the extraction ho ring, located in one of t
fig. 176.
Pull off the hub cap.
If and when 255
Safety Fir Technical Data
olts
e loosened before raising the vehicle.
far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
by the end turn it about one full turn to the
far as it will go over the wheel bolt.
close to the end and turn the bolt to the
.
to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel
Fig. 177 Changing the wheel: loosen the wheel bolts
altea_EN Seite 255 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Wheel covers*
The wheel covers must be removed for access to the wheel
bolts
Removing
Remove the wheel cover using the wire hook.
Hook this into one of the cut-outs of the wheel cover.
Fitting
Fit the wheel cover onto the wheel rim by pressing it firmly. Put
pressure initially on the point of the cut-out for the valve. Then
press the wheel cover onto the steel rim so that it engages all
round.
Loosening the wheel b
The wheel bolts must b
Loosening
Fit the box spanner as
Grasp the box spanner
left fig. 177.
Tightening
Fit the box spanner as
Grasp the box spanner
right until it is secured
An adapter is required
bolts.
If and when256
altea_EN Seite 256 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
WARNING
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack, loosening the wheel bolts more than one turn can result in an acci- dent.
Note Do not use the hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
tighten the wheel bolts.
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing
down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle
for support and take care not to slip.
If and when 257
Safety Fir Technical Data
nt under the door sill closest to the wheel
78.
e jacking point and turn the crank until the
tly below the vertical rib under the door
e arm of the jack fits around the rib under
ovable base plate of the jack is flat on the
defective wheel is just clear of the ground.
r of the door sills mark the jacking points
jacking point for each wheel. Do not fit the jack
e jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack.
tted on solid ground offering good support. Use
cessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as
ilar to prevent the jack from slipping.
at the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to dent.
ged if the jack is not applied at the correct a risk of injury since the jack can slip off engaged.
altea_EN Seite 257 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Raising the vehicle
In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with
a jack.
Locate the jacking poi
to be changed fig. 1
Place the jack under th
arm of the jack is direc
sill.
Align the jack so that th
the door sill and the m
ground fig. 179.
Raise the jack until the
Recesses at the front and rea
fig. 178. There is only one
anywhere else.
An unstable surface under th
Therefore, the jack must be fi
a large and stable base, if ne
tiles) use a rubber mat or sim
WARNING
Take all precautions so th do so could result in an acci
The vehicle can be dama jacking points. There is also suddenly if it is not properly
Fig. 178 The jacking points
Fig. 179 Fitting the jack
If and when258
an and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare
ition and hub mounting surfaces. These
fitting the wheel.
crewdriver handle makes it easier to turn the
rewdriver blade should be removed when the
n of rotation are fitted, note the direction of
ket in the screwdriver handle to loosen or
uired to turn the anti-theft wheel
Fig. 181 Anti-theft wheel bolt
altea_EN Seite 258 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Removing and fitting the wheel
For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be
completed.
After loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack,
change the wheel as described below:
Removing a wheel
Unscrew the bolts using the hexagonal tool in the handle of the
screwdriver (vehicle tool) and place them on a clean surface
fig. 180.
Fitting a wheel
Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them lightly using the
hexagonal socket in the screwdriver handle.
The wheel bolts should be cle
wheel, inspect the wheel cond
surfaces must be clean before
The hexagonal socket in the s
wheel bolts. The reversible sc
tool is used for this purpose.
If tyres with a specific directio
rotation.
Note Do not use the hexagonal soc
tighten the wheel bolts.
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
A special adapter is req
bolts.
Fig. 180 Changing the wheel: Hexagonal socket in screwdriver handle to turn the wheel bolts
If and when 259
Safety Fir Technical Data
yre Mobility System)
d safety notes
a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.
, a sealing compound and an air compressor are
artment under the floor panel.
reliably seal punctures caused by the penetra-
about 4 mm in diameter.
the foreign body from the tyre.
mpound are located on the sealing compound
e air compressor are included in an additional
a puncture with the sealing compound if the riving the car after the tyre has lost its air.
s and follow instructions concerning pound carefully.
80 km/h, avoid heavy acceleration, hard
paired with sealing compound are only suit- short period. Therefore, please drive carefully
ed workshop.
nvironment ainers should be disposed of at a proper facility.
altea_EN Seite 259 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it
will go page 258, fig. 181.
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.
Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.
Error code
The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of
the adaptor.
The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by
using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from an
Authorised Service Centre.
Tyres with directional tread pattern
Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they
rotate in the correct direction.
A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that
point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi-
cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give
maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.
If, in an emergency, you have to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong
direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum
performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads.
To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the
defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again
rotate in the correct direction.
Tyre repair kit* (T
General information an
Your vehicle is equipped with
In the event of a tyre puncture
located in the luggage comp
The Tyre Mobility System will
tion of a foreign body of up to
It is not necessary to remove
Instructions for the sealing co
container.
Notes for the proper use of th
instruction leaflet.
WARNING
Do not attempt to repair tyre has been damaged by d
Always observe warning compressor and sealing com
Do not drive faster than braking and fast cornering.
Tyres which have been re able for temporary use over a to the next available qualifi
For the sake of the e Used sealing compound cont
If and when260
on and place the warning triangle in position. d also warns other road users.
o repair a tyre on a slope.
ents when doing so.
escribe the procedures for repairing
nd
container give detailed information on
compound.
ssor and hose from the container.
onto the valve.
ble into a 12 volt power point.
monitor the pressure shown on the pres-
altea_EN Seite 260 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Note If sealant should leak out, leave it to dry. When it has dried, you can pull
it off like a piece of foil.
Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the
sealing compound exchanged by a qualified workshop.
Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not
possible with the sealing compound.
Preparation work
Certain steps must be taken before repairing a tyre.
If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away
from the flow of traffic as possible.
Apply the handbrake firmly.
Engage first gear, or put the selector lever to position P.
All passengers should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a
safe area (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).
Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility System
General information and safety notes.
Unscrew inflation cap from the affected wheel.
Take the tyre repair kit out of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Put the hazard warning lights This is for your own safety an
Caution Take special care if you have t
Note Please observe legal requirem
Tyre repair
The following sections d
a tyre.
Using the sealing compou
The instructions on the
how to use the sealing
Inflating the tyre.
Remove the air compre
Screw the retaining nut
Plug the compressor ca
Turn on compressor and
sure gauge.
If and when 261
Safety Fir Technical Data
placed
Fig. 182 Left side of dash panel: Fuse box cover
Fig. 183 Fuse box cover in engine compartment
altea_EN Seite 261 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Completing the repair
Remove the compressor hose from the valve.
Fit the valve cap.
Unplug the compressor from the socket.
Return all tools to their proper storing location.
Note If the vehicle is equipped with tyre pressure control, enter the new tyre
pressures using the SET button on the central console.
The compressor should never be allowed to run for longer than 6
minutes.
Fuses
Changing a fuse
Blown fuses must be re
If and when262
s and never replace them with fuses with a ly could result in fire. This could also cause
electrical system.
ows again after a short time, the electrical
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
igher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to
cal system.
uses in the vehicle. These are available from
Amps
5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
80
100
150
200
altea_EN Seite 262 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Fuse cover underneath the steering wheel
Switch off the ignition and the component concerned.
Identify the fuse for the failed component page 264.
Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover, fit it onto the
blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
Fuse cover in engine compartment
Switch off the ignition and its failed electrical component.
Prise off the fuse cover in the engine compartment by pressing
the tabs towards the centre of the cover page 261, fig. 183.
Identify the fuse for the failed component page 264.
Take the plastic clip from inside the fuse cover (at left-hand end
of the dash panel), fit it onto the blown fuse and pull the fuse out.
Replace the blown fuse (which will have a melted metal strip)
with a new fuse of the same ampere rating.
Carefully fit the fuse cover back on to ensure no water can enter
the fuse box.
The individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. The fuses are located
behind a cover at the left-hand end of the dash panel and on the left-hand
side of the engine compartment.
The electric windows are protected by circuit breakers. These reset automat-
ically after a few seconds when the overload (caused for example by frozen
windows) has been corrected.
Fuses colour code
WARNING
Never repair damaged fuse higher rating. Failure to comp damage to other parts of the
Note If a newly replaced fuse bl
system must be checked by a
If you replace a fuse with h
another location in the electri
Always keep some spare f
SEAT dealers.
Colour
light brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Natural (white)
Green
orange
Red
white
Blue
grey
violet
If and when 263
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 263 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Apart from the fuses indicated in the following tables, there are others
which must be replaced by a Technical Service.
If and when264
ith START STOP 5
with START STOP 15
g assistant) / Gear lever/ ESP 10
sensor/ Alarm horn 5
sensor / Light switch 10
nstallation assistant 15
pling automatic gearbox 20
20
ng display) without START STOP 10
er motor 20
/ socket 20
40
it (coupling) 15
Consumer Amps
altea_EN Seite 264 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Fuses on left side of dash panel
Fuses
Number Consumer Amps
1 Vacant
2 Vacant
3 Vacant
4 Vacant
5 Vacant
6 Vacant
7 Vacant
8 Vacant
9 Airbag 5
10 RSE input (roof screen) 10
11 Vacant
12 Left xenon headlight 10
13
Instrument panel (oil level)/Switchboard wiring
(BCM)/Heater / ABS, ESP/ Park Pilot/ Gate-
way/Flow meter
5
14 Gearbox/Servosteering/Brake light sensor/
Trailer/ ABS, ESP/ Haldex/ Light switch 10
15
Heated windscreen / Instrument lighting / Diag-
nosis switchboard/Engine management/Addi-
tional heating/AFS headlamps/Park Pilot
10
16 Right xenon headlight 10
17 Engine management / RSE system with START
STOP 10
18 Kombi / levers w
19 Navigation/ radio
20 Park Pilot (Parkin
switchboard
21 Vacant
22 Volumetric alarm
23 Diagnosis / Rain
24 Trailer hook pre-i
25 Switchboard cou
26 Vacuum pump
27 RSE supply (Ceili
28 Rear window wip
29 Vacant
30 Cigarette lighter
31 Vacant
32 Vacant
33 Heater
34 Vacant
35 Vacant
36 Vacant
37 Vacant
38 Vacant
39 Trailer control un
Number
If and when 265
Safety Fir Technical Data
t, while correct at the time of printing, is subject
s should occur, please refer to the sticker on the
e correct information for your model.
mpartment, left part
Consumer Amps
ers 20
30
it 5
20
15
el/Steering column 5
40
15
Tom Navigator 5
ment 5
ment 10
ol unit 5
module supply 15
module supply 30
20
altea_EN Seite 265 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Some of the electrical items listed in the table are only fitted on certain
models or are optional extras.
Please note that the above lis
to alterations. If discrepancie
inside of the fuse cover for th
Fuses layout, engine co
Fuses
40 Trailer control unit (indicators, brakes and left
side) 20
41 Trailer control unit (fog light, reversing light and
right side) 20
42 BCM wiring switchboard 20
43 Trailer pre-installation 40
44 Rear window heater 25
45 Electric windows (front) 30
46 Rear electric windows 30
47 Engine (Fuel control unit, petrol relay) 15
48 Convenience controls 20
49 Heating controls 40
50 Heated seats 30
51 Sunroof 20
52 Headlight washer system 20
53 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 20
54 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 5
55 Trailer hook pre-installation assistant 20
56 Taxi (taximeter power supply) 15
57 Telephone power supply with START STOP 10
58 Central locking control unit 30
Number Consumer Amps
Number
1 Windscreen wip
2 DQ200 gearbox
3 Cable control un
4 ABS
5 AQ gearbox
6 Instrument pan
7 Ignition key
8 Radio
9 Telephone/Tom
10 Engine manage
Engine manage
11 Vacant
12 Electronic contr
13 Petrol injection
Diesel injection
14 Coil
If and when266
t turn off the failed component.
ingerprints vaporise in the heat, causing a
condensation on the mirror surface, thus
by one of the same type. The type is inscribed
s part or on the base.
eep a box of spare bulbs in the vehicle. At the
bulbs, which are essential for road safety,
justing* )
ulb changes must be made by the SEAT dealer, given
e removed from the vehicle and a reset must be made
m incorporated.
times the light flux and have an average lifespan of 5
bulbs, this means that, except due to unusual circum-
ange the bulbs for the whole life of the vehicle.
altea_EN Seite 266 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Bulb change
General notes
Before changing any bulb, firs
Do not touch the bulb glass. F
reduction in the bulb life and
reducing efficiency.
A bulb should only be replaced
on the bulb, either on the glas
It is highly recommended to k
very least, the following spare
should be kept in the vehicle.
Main headlights
Dipped beam - H7
Main beam - H1
Position - W5W
Indicator - PY21W
Xenon headlights24) / self-ad
Dipped and full beam - D1S25
Daylight - P21W SLL
Position W5W
Indicators PY21W
15 Engine management 5
Pump relay 10
16 Right lighting 30
17 Horn 15
18 Vacant
19 Clean 30
20 Water pump 10
Pressure sensor pump for 1.8 engine 20
21a) Lambda probe 15
22 Brake pedal, speed sensor 5
23a)
Engine management 5
Engine management 10
Engine management 15
24 AKF, gearbox valve 10
25a) ABS pump 40
26 Left lighting 30
27a) Engine management 40
Engine management 50
28 Vacant
29a) Electric windows (front and back) 50
Electric windows (front) 30
30 Ignition key 50
a) Ampere rating according to motorisation
Number Consumer Amps
24) On this type of headlight, the b
that complex elements must b
on the automatic control syste 25) The Xenon bulbs discharge 2.5
times more than that of halogen
stances, there is no need to ch
If and when 267
Safety Fir Technical Data
Fig. 184 Main headlight lamps
altea_EN Seite 267 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Fog lights
Fog lights - H3
Upper rear light
Stop/Position - P21W26)
Indicator - R10W
Lower rear light
Fog light - P21W
Reverse light - P21W
Side indicator
Side indicator - W5W
Registration plate light
Registration plate light - C5W
Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog
lights, the rear lights and the indicators may be temporarily misted. This has
no influence on the life expectancy of the lighting system. By switching on the
lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be
demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.
Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior
lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest
of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users.
Due to the difficulty in accessing the lamps, any replacement work should
be done by a SEAT dealer. However, the following is a description of how to
change the lamps except for the fog lights* and interior lamps.
Main headlight lamps
Indicator
Dipped headlights
Main beam headlights
Side lights
26) Electronically controlled single filament bulb for Stop/side bulbs. If the bulb blows it
will not work in either position or Stop.
AA
AB
AC
AD
If and when268
Fig. 186 Dipped head- lights
Fig. 187 Dipped head- lights
altea_EN Seite 268 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Turn signal lamps
Raise the bonnet.
Rotate the lamp holder fig. 185 to the left and pull.
Remove the bulb by pressing on the lamp holder and rotating at
the same time to the left.
Installation is done in the reverse order.
Dipped beam lights
Raise the bonnet.
Fig. 185 Turn signal lamps
AA
If and when 269
Safety Fir Technical Data
g. 188 by pulling on this.
fig. 189 from the bulb.
. 189 inwards and to the right.
t the replacement so that it sits correctly
reflector.
the reverse order.
Fig. 189 Main beam headlights
AC
A1
A2
altea_EN Seite 269 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Remove the loops page 268, fig. 186 in the direction of
the arrow and remove the cover.
Remove the connector page 268, fig. 187 from the bulb.
Disengage the retainer spring page 268, fig. 187 pressing
inwards to the right.
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the rim of the
attachment plate is on the reflector cut-out.
Main beam lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the cover fi
Remove the connector
Press the spring fig
Extract the bulb and fi
into the cut-out on the
Installation is done in
A1
A2
A3
Fig. 188 Main beam headlights
If and when270
fig. 191 outwards.
lling this out and inserting the replace-
he reverse order.
A1
altea_EN Seite 270 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Side lights
Raise the bonnet.
Remove the cover fig. 190 by pulling on this.
Extract the lamp holder
Replace the bulb by pu
ment.
Installation is done in t
Rear lights
Side lights
Brake lights
Turn signals
Reversing lights
Rear fog light
Fig. 190 Side lights
Fig. 191 Side lights
AD
If and when 271
Safety Fir Technical Data
e luggage compartment lateral panel.
ting fig. 193 securing the rear light.
r under the plastic fitting may help to
ar light from its casing taking care not to
er connector.
age 272, fig. 194 from the lamp holder
rotate to the left then fit the replacement.
in reverse order, taking special care when
. The metal contacts of the lamp holder
tly fitted with respect to the rear light
AB
AC
altea_EN Seite 271 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Side lights and brake lights
Open the tailgate.
Remove the bolts fig. 192 .
Remove the cover of th
Unscrew the plastic fit
Inserting a screwdrive
loosen it.
Partially remove the re
pull on the cable.
Remove the lamp hold
Unscrew the bolts p
and pull on this.
Press on the lamp and
To refit follow the steps
fitting the lamp holder
ends should be correc
contacts.
Fig. 192 Side lights and brake lights
Fig. 193 Side lights and brake lights
AA
If and when272
. 194 from the lamp holder and pull
mp holder using a screw driver in the
fig. 195.
p by pressing it down and rotating to the
erse order.
light
to the left, and remove it in the direction
.
ssing on it and rotating at the same time
AC
Fig. 196 Lamp on interior side of bumper
altea_EN Seite 272 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Turn indicators
Remove the diode from its housing page 271.
Unscrew the bolts fig
on this.
Pull out the indicator la
direction of the arrow
Fit the replacement lam
left.
Installation is in the rev
Reverse light / rear fog
Rotate the lamp holder
of the arrow fig. 196
Replace the bulb by pre
to the left
Fig. 194 Indicator light
Fig. 195 Indicator lights.
If and when 273
Safety Fir Technical Data
lights
essing on the inside edge of this -arrow-
screwdriver fig. 198.
Fig. 198 Luggage compartment light
Fig. 199 Luggage compartment light
altea_EN Seite 273 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Side indicators
Press the indicator to the left or to the right to remove the lamp.
Remove the lamp holder from the indicator.
Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.
Insert the lamp holder in the indicator guide until it clicks into
place.
First place the indicator in the opening in the bodywork, fixing
the tabs fig. 197, arrow .
Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow fig. 197.
Luggage compartment
Remove the bulb by pr
using the flat side of a
Fig. 197 Side indicator
A1
A2
If and when274
ully using the flat side of the screwdriver
e crack as shown by the arrow fig. 200.
ng it in the direction of the arrow and
Fig. 201 Registration light
altea_EN Seite 274 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Press the lamp sideways and remove from its housing
page 273, fig. 199.
Registration light
Remove the bulb, caref
as a lever inserted in th
Remove the bulb, movi
outwards fig. 201.Fig. 200 Registration light
If and when 275
Safety Fir Technical Data
ing it in the direction of the arrow and
ve a sufficient wire cross section.
ause of a discharged battery, the battery can be
nother vehicle to start the engine.
the standard DIN 72553 (see manufacturer's
ss section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol
for diesel engines.
ch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
s are connected.
ust be properly connected to the vehicle elec-
altea_EN Seite 275 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Sunroof light
Carefully remove the lamp, using the flat side of the screwdriver,
as shown in the figure fig. 203.
Remove the bulb, mov
outwards fig. 203.
Jump-starting
Jump leads
The jump lead must ha
If the engine fails to start bec
connected to the battery of a
Jump leads
Jump leads must comply with
documentation). The wire cro
engines and at least 35 mm2
Note The vehicles must not tou
soon as the positive terminal
The discharged battery m
trical system.
Fig. 202 Removing sunroof light
Fig. 203 Removing sunroof light
If and when276
f the black jump lead to a solid metal
lted on to the engine block, or onto the
e vehicle with the flat battery. Do not
ar the battery .
ch a way that they cannot come into
g parts in the engine compartment.
vehicle with the boosting battery and let
car with the flat battery and wait one or
ngine is running.
jump leads, switch off the headlights (if
er and rear window heater in the vehicle
s helps minimise voltage peaks which are
ds are disconnected.
ning, disconnect the leads in reverse
n above.
they have good metal-to-metal contact with
tch off the starter after about 10 seconds and
nute.
AX
altea_EN Seite 276 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
How to jump start: description
fig. 204 shows the flat battery and the charged battery.
Jump lead terminal connections
Switch off the ignition on both vehicles .
1. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive fig. 204
terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery .
2. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive
terminal in the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal
on the battery of the vehicle providing assistance.
4. Connect the other end o
component which is bo
engine block itself of th
connect it to a point ne
5. Position the leads in su
contact with any movin
Starting
6. Start the engine of the
it run at idling speed.
7. Start the engine of the
two minutes until the e
Removing the jump leads
8. Before you remove the
they are switched on).
9. Turn on the heater blow
with the flat battery. Thi
generated when the lea
10. When the engine is run
order to the details give
Connect the battery clamps so
the battery terminals.
If the engine fails to start, swi
try again after about half a mi
Fig. 204 How to connect the jump leads
AA AB
A+
A+
A-
If and when 277
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 277 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
WARNING
Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 226, Working in the engine compartment.
The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.
Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.
Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.
Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.
The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.
Do not bend over the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.
Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as
soon as the positive terminals are connected.
If and when278
ng points if you use a tow-rope:
towing vehicle
il the tow-rope is taut. Then accelerate
s cautiously. If you are driving an auto-
te gently.
ke servo and power steering are not
ou are towing. Brake earlier than you
h a more gentle pressure on the brake.
towed vehicle
e remains taut at all times when towing.
ehicle with a tow-bar. You should only use a
tow-bar.
elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles.
e made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic
-bar only to the towing eyes provided or a
nce, especially when using a tow-rope. Both
the technique required for towing. Inexperi-
pt to tow-start or tow away another vehicle.
altea_EN Seite 278 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Towing and tow-starting
Tow-starting
The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.
We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-starting
is preferable page 275.
However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:
Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.
Keep the clutch pressed down.
Switch the ignition on.
Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.
As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear
lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing
vehicle.
WARNING
The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.
Caution When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.
Comments
Please observe the followi
Notes for the driver of the
Drive slowly at first unt
gradually.
Begin and change gear
matic vehicle, accelera
Remember that the bra
working in the vehicle y
would normally, but wit
Notes for the driver of the
Ensure that the tow-rop
Tow-rope or tow-bar
It is easier and safer to tow a v
tow-rope if you do not have a
A tow-rope should be slightly
It is advisable to use a tow-rop
material.
Attach the tow-rope or the tow
towing bracket.
Driving style
Towing requires some experie
drivers should be familiar with
enced drivers should not attem
If and when 279
Safety Fir Technical Data
ways be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the
starting.
Fig. 205 The front right section of the vehicle: Fitting the front towing eye
Fig. 206 Fitting the towing eye to the rear of the vehicle
altea_EN Seite 279 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the
tow-rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of over-
loading and damaging the anchorage points.
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the
steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals,
horn, windscreen wipers and washers.
As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must apply
considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.
As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you
will need more strength to steer than you normally would.
Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox
Put the selector lever into position N.
Do not drive faster than 50 km/h when towing a vehicle.
Do not tow further than 50 km.
If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels raised.
Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.
Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe
any regulations to the contrary.
For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be
tow-started.
If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gearbox,
you must raise the drive wheels while the vehicle is being towed.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km, the front wheels must be
raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.
The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The
vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be
carried out by a qualified person.
The towing eye should al
notes on page 278, Tow-
Trailer eyes
If and when280
altea_EN Seite 280 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Fitting the towing eye
Take the towing ring from the onboard tool set.
Remove the front cover by pressing down on its left-hand side.
Remove the cover of the screw hole, insert a screwdriver into the
lower slot and lever gently.
Screw the towing eye as shown by the arrow anti-clockwise to the
limit position in the front page 279, fig. 205 or rear
page 279, fig. 206 threaded hole.
General notes on the technical data 281
Safety Fir Technical Data
r, indication of the diesel combustion power.
e number, indication of the knock resistance
altea_EN Seite 281 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Technical Data
General notes on the technical data
Outstanding information
Important considerations
All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence
over this data.
All data provided in this manual are valid for the standard model in Spain. The
vehicle data card included in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle
registration documents shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.
The figures may be different depending on if additional equipment is fitted,
for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.
Abbreviations used in this paragraph of the Technical Data
Abbrevia- tion
Meaning
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
bhp Brake horse power, formerly used to denote engine power
at rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
l/100 km Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.
g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km travelled.
CO2 Carbon dioxide
CN Cetane numbe
RON Research octan
of petrol.
Abbrevia- tion
Meaning
General notes on the technical data282
he inside of the spare wheel recess in the
rovided on the vehicle data sticker: fig. 207.
in the Maintenance Program.
r
ber (chassis number)
ne power output
letters
ior trim code
s
ided in the Maintenance Program.
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) urban
km) / CO2 emissions (g/km) motorway
/ CO2 Emissions (g/km) mixed
altea_EN Seite 282 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Vehicle identification data
The most important data are given on the type plate and the
vehicle data sticker.
Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.
Type plate
The type plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compartment.
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from outside
the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-
hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located
on the right hand side of the engine compartment.
Vehicle data
The data sticker is placed on t
luggage compartment.
The following information is p
These data are also provided
Production control numbe
Vehicle identification num
Model code number
Model designation / engi
Engine and gearbox code
Paintwork number / inter
Optional equipment code
Consumption values
CO2 emissions values
Data from 2 to 9 are also prov
Consumption figures and CO2
Consumption (litres/100
Consumption (litres/100
Consumption (l/100 km)
Fig. 207 Vehicle data sticker boot
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
AA
AB
AC
General notes on the technical data 283
Safety Fir Technical Data
vary from quoted test values, depending on
nd traffic conditions, the weather and the
ic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity
he figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the
onal equipment fittings or for the addition of
e vehicle will increase .
tre of gravity may shift when transporting ct the vehicle's handling and lead to an acci- eed and driving style to suit road conditions
xle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight ad or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, ehicle.
altea_EN Seite 283 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Data on fuel consumption
Fuel consumption
The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle
data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.
The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of the vehicle can be found on the
vehicle data sticker.
The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle
weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox
combination and the equipment fitted.
The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the
EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a real-
istic test method based on normal everyday driving.
The following test conditions are applied:
Note Actual consumption may
personal driving style, road a
vehicle condition.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the bas
and without optional extras. T
weight of the driver.
For special versions and opti
accessories, the weight of th
WARNING
Please note that the cen heavy objects; this may affe dent. Always adjust your sp and requirements.
Never exceed the gross a rating. If the allowed axle lo driving characteristics of the injuries and damage to the v
Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving
is then simulated.
Extra urban
cycle
In the extra urban cycle simulation the vehicle frequently
accelerates and brakes in all gears, as in normal everyday
driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h.
Total con-
sumption
The average total consumption is calculated with a weighting
of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra
urban cycle.
CO2 emis-
sions
The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to
calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is
then analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emis-
sions.
General notes on the technical data284
ins, wheel bolts
ure values can be found on the inside of the
lues given there are for cold tyres. The slightly
s must not be reduced .
ly to the front wheels.
of this manual.
anged, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
possible with a torque wrench . The tight-
y wheels is 120 Nm.
least once per month. Checking tyre pressure tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is
ents, particularly at high speeds.
bolts is too low, they could loosen while the ccident! If the tightening torque is too high,
can be damaged.
our Authorised Service Centre for information
and snow chain size.
altea_EN Seite 284 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Towing a trailer
Trailer weights
Trailer weights
The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive
trials according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are
valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (in certain
circumstances up to 100 km/h). The figures may be different in other coun-
tries. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over these
data .
Drawbar load
The maximum permitted weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint
of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow
approaching the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the
road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small,
empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with an axle
base of less than 1 metre), at least 4% of the actual trailer weight is a legal
stipulation for a drawbar load.
WARNING
For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.
Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the draw bar loading. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
Wheels
Tyre pressure, snow cha
Tyre pressures
The sticker with the tyre press
tank flap. The tyre pressure va
raised pressures of warm tyre
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted on
Consult the chapter wheels
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been ch
should be checked as soon as
ening torque for steel and allo
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure at value is very important. If the an increased danger of accid
If the torque of the wheel vehicle is in motion. Risk of a the wheel bolts and threads
Note We recommend that you ask y
about appropriate wheel, tyre
Technical Data 285
Safety Fir Technical Data
ions and restrictions on the technical data as of
altea_EN Seite 285 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Technical Data
Checking fluid levels
From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the
vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids,
otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Brake fluid reservoir
Vehicle battery (underneath the cover)
The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the components
mentioned above. These operations are described in the page 226.
Overview
Further explanations, instruct
page 281 are given.
Fig. 208 Diagram for the location of the various elements
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Technical Data286
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
altea_EN Seite 286 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Petrol engine 1.4 63 kW (85 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 63 (85)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 132/ 3600-3800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) Slight power loss.
Maximum speed in km/h 169
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 9,7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 14,8
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1886
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1366
Front gross axle weight in kg 940
Rear gross axle weight in kg 984
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 680
With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1200
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1000
Technical Data 287
Safety Fir Technical Data
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
altea_EN Seite 287 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.4 92 kW (125 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 2.8 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 92 (125)/ 5000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 200/ 1500-4000
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1390
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) With a slight power loss
Maximum speed in km/h 194
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 10,3
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1959
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1439
Front gross axle weight in kg 1008
Rear gross axle weight in kg 987
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Technical Data288
Running on petrol
75 (102)/ 5600
148/ 3800
4/ 1595
Super 95 octane rating or Regular 91
octane ratinga)
Running on petrol
181
8,9
13,2
altea_EN Seite 288 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.6 75 kW (102 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Trailer without brakes 710
With brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1300
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 3.3 litres
Running on LPG
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 72 (98)/ 5600
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 144/ 3800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1595
Fuel LPG
a) Slight power loss.
Running on LPG
Maximum speed in km/h 178
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 9,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 13,8
Technical Data 289
Safety Fir Technical Data
ON or regular unleaded 91 RONa)
altea_EN Seite 289 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Petrol engine 1.8 l 118 kW (160 HP)
Engine specifications
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1951
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1456
Gross front axle weight in kg 965
Gross rear axle weight in kg 1000
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 720
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1200
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.1 litres
Power output in kW (HP) rpm 118 (160)4500-6200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1500-4500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1798
Fuel Premium unleaded 95 R
a) Slight power loss.
Technical Data290
Automatic
210
5,8
8,4
Automatic
2015
1495
1062
994
75
Automatic
740
1500
1400
altea_EN Seite 290 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Manual
Maximum speed in km/h 210
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 5,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 8,4
Manual
Gross vehicle weight in kg 1995
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1475
Gross front axle weight in kg 1062
Gross rear axle weight in kg 994
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Manual
Trailer without brakes 730
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.6 litres
Technical Data 291
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 291 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Diesel engine 1.9 l TDI 66 kW (90 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 66 (90)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 210/1800
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane- Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Maximum speed in km/h 183
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 8,4
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 12,6
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2000
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1480
Front gross axle weight in kg 1045
Rear gross axle weight in kg 980
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 740
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Technical Data292
Automatic
183
8,1
12,5
Automatic
2030
1510
altea_EN Seite 292 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 1.9 l TDI 77 kW (105 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (HP) rpm 77 (105)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250/1900
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/1896
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane- Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel
Manual
Maximum speed in km/h 183
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 8,2
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 12,3
Manual
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2005
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1480
Technical Data 293
Safety Fir Technical Data
1074
982
75
Automatic
750
1500
1400
altea_EN Seite 293 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Diesel engine 2.0 l TDI 103 kW (140 HP)
Engine specifications
Gross front axle weight in kg 1045
Gross rear axle weight in kg 983
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Manual
Trailer without brakes 740
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Power output in kW (bhp) rpm 103 (140)/ 4000
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320/ 1750 - 2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CNa)
a) Cetane- Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.
Technical Data294
Automatic
201
6,7
9,8
Automatic
2060
1540
1105
980
75
altea_EN Seite 294 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Engine oil capacity
Manual
Maximum speed in km/h 201
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6,9
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 9,9
Manual
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2025
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1505
Gross front axle weight in kg 1070
Gross rear axle weight in kg 975
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.3 litres
Technical Data 295
Safety Fir Technical Data
altea_EN Seite 295 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Diesel engine 2.0l 125 kW (170 bhp)
Engine specifications
Performance figures
Weights
Trailer weights
Power output in kW (HP) rpm 125 (170)/ 4200
Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350/ 1750-2500
No. of cylinders, capacity in cm 3 4/ 1968
Fuel Min. 51 CZ
Maximum speed in km/h 211
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in seconds 6.1
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in seconds 8.6
Gross vehicle weight in kg 2025
Weight in working order (with driver) in kg 1505
Front gross axle weight in kg 1092
Rear gross axle weight in kg 982
Permitted roof load in kg 75
Trailer without brakes 750
Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 1500
Trailers with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1400
Technical Data296
altea_EN Seite 296 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Engine oil capacity
Approximate engine oil capacity with oil filter change 4.8 litres
Technical Data 297
Safety Fir Technical Data
m
Rear
1,509 mm
1,523 mm
altea_EN Seite 297 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
st Operating instructions Practical tips
Dimensions and capacities
Dimensions
Length, width 4,282 mm/ 1,768 m
Height at kerb weight 1,546 mm
Front and rear projection 916 mm/ 788 mm
Wheelbase 2,578 mm
Turning circle 10.7 m
Track widtha)
a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
Front
1,525 mm
1,539 mm
Capacities
Fuel tank 55 l. Reserve 7 l.
Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 3 l/ 5.5 l
Tyre pressure
Summer-grade tyres:
The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.
Winter tyres:
The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.
altea_EN Seite 298 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Index 299
tery
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
tension device
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
ke assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
ke fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
ke pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ke servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193, 200
ke system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
kes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
king distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
b changes
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
b defect
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
zer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 169
altea_EN Seite 299 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Index
A ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Acoustic signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Acoustic warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
AFS (curve lights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Air conditioner*
2C-Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Air conditioning system
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Air recirculation mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Alarm system
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Alternator
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Ambient temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 73
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Anti-puncture tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Ashtray* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror*
Activating the anti-dazzle function . . . . . . 129
Deactivating anti-dazzle function . . . . . . . . 129
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Automatic gearbox
Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Automatic gearbox / DSG automatic gearbox . 178
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Automatic mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Automatic wiper/wash function for the rear window
128
Auxiliary audio connection: AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . 149
B Ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Bat
Belt
Belt
Bio
Bio
Bon
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bra
Bul
Bul
Buz
Index300
k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
seat covers cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
es hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
pit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
rol lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
rol lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
rols
lectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ight switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
enience closing
liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
enience opening
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
ant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 234
oolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ant level
arning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
ant Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ant temperature
isplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
afety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
e control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
e control system
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
e control*
urning off the cruise control system . . . . 190
altea_EN Seite 300 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
C Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Automatic locking system for involuntary
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Automatic speed dependent locking and un-
locking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Emergency unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Selective unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Unlocking system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Central locking button
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Changing gear
See Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Changing gear in Tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Changing the lamps
Main headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Changing the main headlight lamps
dipped beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
main beam lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Changing the rear lights
indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . 273
rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
reverse light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 236
Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Checking battery electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 241
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Child seats
on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Cleaning and caring for your vehicle . . . . . . . . 209
Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Climatic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Climatronic
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Cloc
Cloth
Cloth
Cock
Cont
Cont
Cont
E
L
Conv
S
W
Conv
W
Cool
C
Cool
Cool
w
Cool
Cool
D
S
Cruis
Cruis
W
Cruis
T
Index 301
amic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 117
logical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
nomical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
trical sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
tronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
tronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 170
tronic stabilisation program . . . . . . . . . . . 195
tronic stabilisation programme . . . . . . . . . . 85
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
tronic stabilisation programme (ESP)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
rgency braking function . . . . . . . . . . 119, 193
rgency manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
rgency opening
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ssion control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ine
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ine compartment
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . 226
ine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
altea_EN Seite 301 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Dash panel menu
Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Example of menu use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Lights and visibility menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Dash panel menus
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Vehicle status menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Daytime lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Diesel engine
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Differential lock fault (EDL)
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Dipped headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Disabling front passenger airbag
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disabling the airbag
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 44
Display (without warning or information texts) . 61
Displays in the Multi-function display
Memory displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Disposal
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Doors
Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Drinks holders at the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Drive wheels traction control system . . . . . . . . 194
Driveshaft differential
XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Driving
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Economical/ Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
With a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Driving with an automatic gearbox / DSG automatic
gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Dynamic curve lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Dyn
E Eco
Eco
EDL
EDS
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Elec
Eme
eme
Eme
Emi
Eng
Eng
Eng
Index302
iesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
etrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
level
dicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
arning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Tank
pening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
tank
ee Fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
ral overview of the engine compartment 285
e compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
arning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 183
rd warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
altea_EN Seite 302 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Engine fault
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Engine management
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Engine oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Engine oil pressure
monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Environmental tip
Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 195
Example of menu use
Program a speed limit warning . . . . . . . . . . 69
To activate and deactivate the speed limit
warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Example of the use of the menus
Open the Configuration menu with the MFD
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Open the Configuration menu with the steering
wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Examples of menu use
Open the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Open the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
To close the winter tyres menu . . . . . . . . . . 69
Exhaust gasses purification system . . . . . . . . 201
Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
F Fabric trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . 118
folding table* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Folding the seat backrests down . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Foot brake
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Four wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . 44
Front reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Front seat adjustment
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Frontal airbags
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fuel
D
P
Fuel
In
Fuel
w
Fuel
O
Fuel
S
Fuel:
Fuse
G G 12
Gear
Gene
Glov
Glow
W
GRA
H Hand
W
Haza
Index 303
n beam headlights
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
n headlight lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
ntenance
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
ual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
ual mode
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
IA-IN connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
age display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
ors
Exterior mirrors, electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Make-up mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
ile telephones and radiotelephones . . . . 219
ti-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ti-purpose* mobile stowage compartment 146
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
ber of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ervations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
altea_EN Seite 303 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
head restraints
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 134
adjustment of the head restraint angle . . . 134
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
head restraints, correct adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 13
In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Headlight flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Headlights
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Heated front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Heated window
2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Hill-start aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Indicators
indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Information texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Instrument and switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Interior front light, type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Interior front light, type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Intermittent wipe, windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
J Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
L Leather cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
LPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 173, 221
LPG system
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Filler neck adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Level indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 152
Luggage compartment net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
M Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 120
Mai
Mai
Mai
Man
Man
MED
MFD
Mile
Mirr
Mob
Mul
Mul
N Num
O Obs
Index304
elling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
stration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
ote control key
uttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
ynchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
oving and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
irs
irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
acement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
acement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
ounter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
rse gear
anual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
back function
liding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
indows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
aerial* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
stowage compartment* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
er seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
ing in
ngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ty equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ty instructions
oolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
altea_EN Seite 304 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
One-touch opening and closing
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Opening and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Overview
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
P Paintwork
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Parking system plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Petrol engines, starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 21
Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Power steering system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 209
R Radio frequency remote control
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Radio navigation Steering wheel controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Radio wave remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Rain sensor* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Rear drink holder*
Armrest* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rear fog light
Indication lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Rear interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Rear reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear seat bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Rear shelf
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Rear window heating
Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Rear-view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Recommended gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Refu
Regi
Rem
B
S
Rem
Repa
a
Repl
Repl
Rev c
Reve
M
Roll-
S
W
Roof
Roof
Roof
Rubb
Runn
E
S Safe
Safe
Safe
Safe
C
Index 305
ering wheel audio controls
audio + telephone version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
audio version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ring wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 167
rage compartment
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
wage area
Centre arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Other stowage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
wage compartment
Front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
wage in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 142
visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
roof blind
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
tch
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
tches
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Electrical exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
tching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Emergency opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
altea_EN Seite 305 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Safety notes
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Belt tension devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Disabling front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . 45
frontal airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Safety system- safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132, 135, 137
Seat belt position
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Seat belts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Seat belts protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Selective opening* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Sitting position
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Sliding/tilting roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 284
Soot accumulation in the diesel engine particulate
filter
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Starting Petrol engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 171
After the fuel tank has been run dry . . . . . . 171
Start-Stop
deactivating and activating . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Ste
Stee
Sto
Sto
Sto
Sto
Sun
Sun
Sun
Swi
Swi
Swi
T Tail
Index306
cle paintwork
roducts for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 209
axing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
cle tools
torage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
cle wallet storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
cle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
ilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
metric sensor*
ctivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
eactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
ing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ing reports
ed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ing texts in the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
ing triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
her fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
hing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
hing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 211
r
arning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
r in the windscreen washer tank . . . . . . . 235
r indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
el bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 284
orque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
el change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
altea_EN Seite 306 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Tank
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
reserve indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
TCS (Traction control system)
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 22
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Tow starting
Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Traction control system
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Trailer
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Trailer eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Trailer turn signals
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Trips, checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 120
Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Tyre Mobility-System (Tyre repair kit) . . . 252, 259
Tyre monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 259
Tyres and wheels
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Tyres service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . 243
U Underbody sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Unlocking and locking
Personalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
V Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Vehicle Maintenance
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Vehi
P
W
Vehi
S
Vehi
Vehi
Vent
Volu
A
D
W Warn
Warn
Warn
R
Y
Warn
Warn
Was
Was
Was
Wate
w
Wate
Wea
Whe
T
Whe
Index 307
altea_EN Seite 307 Mittwoch, 26. August 2009 6:00 18
Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243, 284
Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 30
Why should head restraints be correctly adjusted?
13
Why to wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 30
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Windscreen washer fluid
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Windscreen wiper blades
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Changing the rear blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Winter driving
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Wiper/wash automatic function . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 226
Related manuals for Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Altea Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Altea as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Altea. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Altea Edition 07.09 2009 Hatchback Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.